summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/43856-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to '43856-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--43856-0.txt7941
1 files changed, 7941 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/43856-0.txt b/43856-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b6c818
--- /dev/null
+++ b/43856-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7941 @@
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 43856 ***
+
+[Illustration: At sight of the hole and freshly upturned earth, Hunter
+grew livid with rage. Page 140.
+
+_The Boy Chums Cruising in Florida Waters._]
+
+
+
+
+The Boy Chums Cruising in Florida Waters
+
+OR
+
+The Perils and Dangers of the Fishing Fleet
+
+ By WILMER M. ELY
+
+ Author of
+
+ "The Boy Chums on Indian River," "The Boy Chums in
+ The Forest," "The Boy Chums' Perilous Cruise,"
+ "The Boy Chums on Haunted Island," "The
+ Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico."
+
+[Illustration]
+
+ A. L. BURT COMPANY
+ NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+ Copyright, 1914
+ BY A. L. BURT COMPANY.
+
+ THE BOY CHUMS CRUISING IN FLORIDA WATERS.
+
+
+
+Contents
+
+
+ CHAPTER PAGE
+ I. OLD FRIENDS 3
+ II. GETTING SETTLED 12
+ III. THE FIRST ALARM 20
+ IV. THE WARNING 29
+ V. FRIENDLY ADVICE 38
+ VI. THE MIDNIGHT LIGHT 47
+ VII. THE MYSTERY 56
+ VIII. THE VISITORS 65
+ IX. MORE TROUBLE 74
+ X. ONE NIGHT'S SPORT 83
+ XI. THE QUARREL 92
+ XII. THE GHOST 102
+ XIII. CHRIS' STORY 111
+ XIV. A CUNNING TRICK 120
+ XV. THE MYSTERY DEEPENS 129
+ XVI. AN ACCIDENT 138
+ XVII. MORE MYSTERIES 146
+ XVIII. MORE MISCHIEF 154
+ XIX. TELLING MR. DANIELS 163
+ XX. THE GROUPER BANKS 172
+ XXI. HAPPY DAYS 181
+ XXII. TREASURE TROVE 189
+ XXIII. SALVAGE HUNTERS 198
+ XXIV. THE ACCIDENT 206
+ XXV. THE STORM 214
+ XXVI. CASTAWAYS 222
+ XXVII. HOMEWARD BOUND 231
+ XXVIII. THE CHUMS HAVE TWO CALLERS 239
+ XXIX. AN IDLE DAY 248
+ XXX. THE DISCOVERY 256
+ XXXI. THE FISH 265
+ XXXII. ABOUT MANY THINGS 274
+ XXXIII. THE SMUGGLERS AGAIN 283
+ XXXIV. THE SURPRISE 292
+ XXXV. AND THE LAST 301
+
+
+
+
+THE BOY CHUMS CRUISING IN FLORIDA WATERS.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+OLD FRIENDS.
+
+
+"IS this Mr. Daniels?"
+
+The busy man at the paper-littered desk swung around in his chair
+and treated the speaker and his three companions to a brief but keen
+appraising glance. Swift as it was, he noted that the questioner was
+a sturdy, well-built lad with a frank open face deeply tanned by wind
+and sun. His companions consisted of another boy about the same age but
+of slighter build, an elderly, stout, heavily-whiskered man with the
+unmistakable stamp of the sailor in his bearing, and a little negro
+lad with a grinning, good-humored face. All three bore an appearance
+of health and cleanliness and their clothes, though old and worn, were
+neatly patched and as spotless as soap and water could make them.
+
+"Daniels is my name," he replied, briskly, "what can I do for you?"
+
+"We want a chance to fish for you, sir."
+
+"Have you had any experience?"
+
+"My companions have never fished any but I put in a couple of seasons
+at it. We all know how to handle boats and none of us are afraid of
+work," declared the spokesman of the little party, eagerly.
+
+"I seldom engage green men," said Mr. Daniels, "but I will talk with
+you a little further, later," he added, hastily, as he saw the look of
+disappointment on the four faces. "I am a pretty busy man now. I have
+got to get some letters off on the morning train. Look around and amuse
+yourselves for half an hour and I will then be at liberty."
+
+The four strangers needed no second bidding. Even as they had been
+waiting, they had cast interested glances through the open office
+door at the busy scene in the immense building adjoining. Now, as
+Mr. Daniels turned back to his desk, they stepped out into the great
+barn-like room and gazed around with eager curiosity. Everywhere was
+bustle and hustle. At the far end of the building, a dozen wagons
+were unloading their burdens in great glistening heaps upon the clean
+water-deluged floor, fish, fish, thousands upon thousands of them. In
+one corner rose a great mound of trout, a simmering mass of white,
+bronze, and rainbow spots, close to these lay a heap of Spanish
+mackerel, beautiful in their rich coloring of silver and gold; just
+beyond the mackerel rose a greenish-blue pile of hundreds of blue
+fish and close beside these lay a snow-like mountain of ocean mullet,
+while further on, was heaped up, a miscellaneous collection of finny
+creatures, sea bass, gorgeous in their rich golden bronze, quaint
+bird-like sea robins, lacey-winged flying fish, repulsive looking
+flounders, and a hundred and one humble little dwellers of the sea
+that had fallen victims to the all-embracing nets. Down the length of
+the room, groups of men were working frantically to lessen the rapidly
+growing mounds of fish. It almost seemed a combat between the stream
+of loaded wagons and the busy workers. One group labored furiously at
+the heaps, shoveling the fish into big, swinging, scoop-like scales. As
+soon as the scales showed two hundred pounds, they were swung forward
+to another group and their contents dumped on the floor. This group,
+with skillful, flying hands, packed the fish in layers into empty
+barrels. For every layer of fish, a hurrying line of men dumped in a
+huge shovelful of chopped ice. As soon as it was filled, the barrel
+was taken in charge by other waiting hands. The head nailed in, it was
+rolled out on a platform at the far end where a car lay waiting on a
+side track to hurry it away to the fish-hungry folks of the northern
+cities.
+
+The little negro lad gazed at the busy scene with distended eyes.
+
+"Massa Chas, Massa Chas," he exclaimed, at last, "dar ain't no use ob
+you white chillens trying to catch no fish."
+
+"Why, Chris?" questioned the larger lad.
+
+"'Cause dey's done cotched dem all. Dar can't be many left, Massa Chas."
+
+"Nonsense, Chris, there's as good fish in the sea as ever came out of
+it."
+
+"Maybe so," said the little negro, doubtfully, "but I reckon dar ain't
+so many ob dem."
+
+"You can not prove there isn't," laughed Charley.
+
+"May be not," said the little negro, with dignity, "but you-alls had
+ought to take a cullard gentleman's word widout any proof."
+
+"So I will, Chris," agreed the white lad, with a twinkle in his eye,
+"but there is Mr. Daniels beckoning to us. Let's see what he has to
+say."
+
+"Take a chair and I will talk with you, now," said Mr. Daniels as they
+re-entered the office. "Now, first, I would like to know what has given
+you and your friends this fishing idea. Fishermen are a pretty rough
+class as a rule and you all seem fitted for a better class of work.
+Tell me something about yourselves, please."
+
+"There isn't much to tell, sir," said the boy spokesman, modestly. "We
+four have been comrades for several years and we hate to separate now.
+We were sponge fishing out of Tarpon Springs but we lost our schooner
+through trouble with our crew. We saved only the clothes on our backs.
+We have to get something to do right off. Fishing seems to be the only
+thing in this part of the state that we would be able to work at and
+keep together. We heard of you, sir, in Tarpon Springs. We arrived
+here at Clearwater this morning. In fact, we came here direct from the
+station."
+
+There was a curious gleam in Mr. Daniels' eye as he listened to this
+terse, business-like explanation. "What kind of work have you done
+besides sponging?" he questioned.
+
+"We have been kind of Jack-Of-All-Trades," smiled the lad. "We have
+raised truck on the East Coast, fished for pearls in the West Indies,
+hunted plume birds in the Everglades, and gathered wreckage on the
+Atlantic beaches."
+
+"Your names?" demanded Mr. Daniels, eagerly.
+
+"My name is Charley West, sir. This is my chum, Walter Hazard; this
+gentleman is our good friend, Captain Westfield, and this," indicating
+the little negro with a smiling nod, "is Mr. Christopher Columbus."
+
+"I suspected it," exclaimed Mr. Daniels. "You are the boy chums whose
+adventures have been told in several books. I have a boy at home who
+has them all. He has made me read them over to him 'til I know them by
+heart."
+
+Charley blushed, much embarrassed. "I am afraid the writer has made too
+much of our little adventures," he said, modestly. "We had no idea he
+was an author when he got us talking about our trips or we would not
+have talked so freely."
+
+"Well, he speaks well of the boy-chums," smiled Mr. Daniels, "and I
+am going to take his recommendation. As I have already said, I do not
+often engage green men but I am going to give you four a chance. But
+before you decide to go into it, I want you to understand that this
+fishing business is no picnic."
+
+"We do not expect it to be any picnic," replied Charley, quietly.
+
+"In the first place, it is dangerous," Mr. Daniels continued. "Besides
+the risk from storms and accidents, there are dangers from fish and sea
+reptiles. Then, too, there are often troubles with other fishermen. As
+a class, fishermen are rough and lawless. In my position, with hundreds
+of men working for me, it would ruin my business to take sides with any
+one man or set of men in my employ. They must settle their quarrels
+among themselves. As the old saying goes, 'Every tub must stand on its
+own bottom.'"
+
+"We will be careful and keep out of trouble," Walter assured him.
+
+"One can not always avoid it," Mr. Daniels replied. "In addition to
+the drawbacks I have mentioned, fishing is extremely hard, trying,
+nasty work, although I will say that it seems a wonderfully healthy
+occupation. Fishermen are seldom sick."
+
+"Does it pay?" Captain Westfield inquired.
+
+"That depends largely upon the fisherman. Of course, there is an
+element of luck in fishing. Experience counts for something, too, but
+in the main, as in everything else, it is the amount of work that
+decides success or failure. Some of my men make as high as two hundred
+dollars a week, others hardly make a living."
+
+Charley glanced inquiringly at his comrades who answered with nods.
+
+"We will try it, if you please," he said, quietly.
+
+"All right," replied Mr. Daniels, briskly. "You shall have just the
+same outfit I furnish the rest of my men. Four nets,--that is, one for
+each of you,--three skiffs, and a motor boat. I furnish the motor boat
+and the skiffs free, but you are expected to keep them up in good shape
+and to buy your own gasoline and oils. As for the nets, I sell them to
+you at cost, I take out one-third of your fish until they are paid for."
+
+"That seems a very liberal arrangement," Charley observed.
+
+"I have to do it in order to get enough fish to keep my customers
+supplied. Now, as to shelter, you will have to have a place to stay.
+Out on the long wharf that runs out into the bay, you will find a
+number of little houses which belong to me. You can use any one of them
+that is not already occupied."
+
+"You are very kind," said Charley.
+
+"Not at all. Now, one thing more. Are you supplied with money?"
+
+"We saved nothing from our schooner but the clothes we had on," Charley
+admitted.
+
+"Then I will tell Mr. Bacon, the store-keeper, to let you have what
+groceries and clothing you need until you get to earning. Oh! by the
+way, I forgot to ask you if you can run a motor boat?"
+
+"We have never run one, but we could soon learn."
+
+"Well, I'll send a man down with your nets this afternoon and have him
+show you the boats that you will use and also give you a lesson in
+running the engine. You'll soon catch on to it--it's simple. And now,"
+he concluded, "that, I believe, finishes our business arrangements and
+now I have a favor to ask of you."
+
+"After your kindness, we would do anything in our power," Charley
+promised, gratefully but rashly.
+
+"Good! I want all four of you to come up to dinner with me. That boy
+of mine would give me fits if I let the Boy Chums get away from me
+without him meeting them."
+
+Our little party of chums were too modest to relish the idea of a
+dinner under such conditions; but, after Mr. Daniels' kindness to them,
+they could not do other than accept the proffered invitation much as
+they would have liked to refuse.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+GETTING SETTLED.
+
+
+THE dinner proved less embarrassing than the little band of adventurers
+had feared. To be sure Mr. Daniels' son, a sturdy little lad of eight,
+stared at them constantly with wide-eyed hero worship and plied them
+with an army of questions about their adventures; but the boys, who
+detested talking of their exploits, skillfully directed his questions
+to Chris and the vain little darkey, glad of the chance to brag,
+entertained the little lad with wonderful yarns of their adventures, in
+all of which he made himself out the hero. Mrs. Daniels proved to be
+a nice, motherly, little lady who quickly made them all feel at their
+ease, while Mr. Daniels exerted himself to make the meal pleasant for
+them. As soon as they decently could, however, the four took their
+departure, for they were anxious to see something of the little town
+and to get settled in their new home.
+
+"Let's go down to the wharf first of all," Walter proposed as soon as
+they were out on the street. "We want to pick out our house the first
+thing we do."
+
+There was but one main street to the little town and a question put to
+a passer-by got the information that it led down to the wharf.
+
+A few minutes' walk brought them past the straggling row of stores
+that comprised the town's business center. Just beyond these the four
+stopped to gaze around in admiration and delight.
+
+"My! It's beautiful!" Charley exclaimed.
+
+"A regular Paradise," Walter agreed.
+
+Before them stretched a wide street of snow white lime rock, overhung
+by gigantic live oak and magnolia trees. Back a little ways from the
+street nestled houses almost lost 'mid trees and flowers. Between
+them and the sidewalks were gardens blazing with a mad riot of color.
+The rich yellow of alamandas mingled with the deep purple of Chinese
+paper flowers and the warm blue of Lady Alices. Here and there stood
+Royal Poinciana trees and a vivid blaze of scarlet. Great flowered
+cacti reared their thorny forms high in the air and delicate lace-like
+ferns grew all around. In and out amongst the blaze of color flitted
+gorgeous-hued tropical birds twittering to each other, while here and
+there frisked little gray squirrels chattering excitedly over the
+fallen acorns.
+
+Captain Westfield drew in a long breath of the sweet flower-scented
+air. "I am going to like Clearwater," he declared.
+
+"Well, we are going to have lots of time to get acquainted with it,"
+observed Charley, practically. "We had better be moving on now, it is
+going to be a busy afternoon for us."
+
+But at the end of the gently sloping street they paused again with
+murmurs of admiration. Before them a long wharf ran out into a great
+bay, its waters blue as indigo save where flecked by foaming white
+caps. Across on the other side of the bay, and about two miles distant,
+stretched a chain of white-beached islands between which the foamy
+churning breakers showed where the waters of the bay connected with the
+Gulf of Mexico. But our little party spent only a moment admiring the
+beautiful scene, they would have long weeks to admire its loveliness.
+Just now they were more interested in the wide snowy beach on either
+side of the wharf. Here was a living picture of part, at least, of
+their new occupation. The shore was dotted with groups of fishermen
+engaged in tasks pertaining to their calling. Some were busy mending
+long nets stretched out on racks of poles. Some were pulling nets into
+their boats preparatory to a start for the fishing grounds. Others,
+just in from a trip, were pulling their wet nets out to dry. Still
+others were busy calking, painting and repairing their skiffs upturned
+on the beach, while here and there little groups were engaged over
+camp-fires from which rose appetizing odors of frying fish and steaming
+coffee. Close in to the beach the fishing fleet lay bobbing at anchor,
+a hundred skiffs and at least half as many motor boats.
+
+As our little party stood watching the busy scene, a motor boat with
+three skiffs in tow came chugging in for the beach. When within a
+stone's throw of the shore it rounded up and anchored. Almost before
+the anchor had touched bottom a man had jumped into each skiff, cast
+it lose from the launch, and was sculling in for the beach. Our little
+party joined the group that gathered at the water's edge to meet the
+newcomers. The skiffs lay deep in the water and the reason was apparent
+when they grounded on the sands. Each was heaped from thwart to thwart
+with flat silver colored fish.
+
+"Pompano!" exclaimed Charley.
+
+"Pompano," snarled a sallow-faced, tough-looking fisherman near him.
+"That's just the luck of that Roberts gang. Tarnation stuck up guys.
+Won't have nothing to do with us fishermen. Think themselves too good.
+They are greenhorns too. Only started fishing this season. They have
+regular fools' luck though. Just like their luck to hit a nice bunch
+like that when better fishermen are coming in without a fish. They had
+ought to be run out of Clearwater."
+
+The man in the nearest skiff heard the sneer and his good-humored face
+took on a look of scorn. He surveyed the speaker from head to foot as
+though he was examining some strange kind of animal. Then he spoke
+slowly and deliberately.
+
+"Run us out of town, you cowardly cur?" "Why, there isn't enough of
+your kind in the state of Florida to run one Roberts. If you ever ran
+anything in your life it was a rabbit. I've heard enough of your sneers
+and I give you notice right now to quit. Yes, the Roberts boys do
+consider themselves too good to associate with you and your kind. Not
+because you are fishermen but because you are lazy, lying, thieving,
+rum-drinking bums. It's time some one told you the truth about
+yourself. You and your gang seem to have the rest of the fishermen
+bluffed so they will stand for your sneers. You talk about luck. Well,
+maybe it is luck, but let me tell you there's mighty hard work to back
+it up. We have hunted over fifty miles of water, been without sleep for
+thirty-six hours, and worked 'til we can hardly stand, for these fish.
+Luck! You make me sick! If you worked one night a week like we work
+right along your poor little wife would not have to work her fingers to
+the bone over the wash-tub to support you. Hunter, you are a disgrace
+to mankind."
+
+The sallow fisherman's face went livid and he gasped and spluttered
+with rage. His hands clenched and he made a movement towards the man in
+the skiff but evidently prudence got the better of his rage.
+
+"I'll pay you for this, Bill Roberts. I'll pay you out. You see if I
+don't," he cried.
+
+"I know what you are thinking about," returned Roberts in level tones.
+"I know of the tricks you have played on other men that have crossed
+you. I know what happened to them, but don't you think for a moment
+that I'll make the mistake they made in going to law about it when they
+couldn't prove anything. If any such accidents happen to us, I'll not
+go to law about it. I'll beat the miserable little soul out of your
+body. Get away from here or I may do it now."
+
+Hunter slunked away muttering curses and the other fishermen strolled
+off behind him.
+
+Bill Roberts looked after them with a grin. "That fellow gets my goat,"
+he chuckled. "I'm sorry I lost my temper but I'm about worn out from
+work and loss of sleep and my nerves are on wire edge. I've no use for
+that fellow anyway, and I guess I would have told him my opinion of
+him, sooner or later."
+
+"You seem to have been fairly well paid for your hard work," observed
+Captain Westfield. "You've got twenty or thirty dollars' worth there,
+haven't you?"
+
+Charley chuckled and Bill Roberts grinned.
+
+"I see you don't savey pompano," he said. "They are a scarce fish. I
+reckon we've got one thousand pounds of them and they are worth forty
+cents a pound. Figger that out, Mister."
+
+"Four hundred dollars," gasped Walter. "Whew! I hope we strike a few
+bunches like that, Charley."
+
+"You folks going to fish, eh?" enquired Roberts. "Well, it's a good
+healthy business and it pays well for hard work. We don't often strike
+a bunch like this, but by keeping steady at it, we always make pretty
+good money. The worst drawback about fishing is the men in it. Take my
+advice and avoid them all you can. Don't get mixed up with that Hunter
+gang anyway if you can help it. Drop into our camp,--it's right over
+there on Tates Island,--whenever you feel like it, and we will give you
+all the pointers we can."
+
+Charley thanked the friendly fisherman. "We will be over there soon,"
+he promised. "We are new to the place and we would like to get some
+pointers right off but we are just getting settled and must hurry off
+now."
+
+"I like that gang," he said to his companions as they hurried out on
+the long dock. "They seem of a better class than those other fishermen."
+
+"They would not have to be very good to be that," observed Captain
+Westfield, gravely. "Those fishermen are a tough looking lot. I hope we
+will not have any trouble with them."
+
+"We will not have any," said Walter, cheerfully. "If we just tend to
+our own business I guess they will tend to theirs. Well, I guess these
+are the houses Mr. Daniels spoke about."
+
+They had reached the end of the long dock. On one side of it stood a
+row of small shacks. Most of them were occupied but at last they came
+upon a large one that stood empty.
+
+"Golly," exclaimed Chris, as he peeped inside, "dar poor white trash
+dat lived in dis was sho' dirty."
+
+The floor was thickly covered with filth and rubbish, the walls were
+tobacco stained, and the windows were broken and covered with grime.
+
+"We'll soon make it look different," said Captain Westfield,
+cheerfully. "Let's go to work with some system and we'll soon be
+comfortably settled. Walter, you make out a list of what we need and go
+up to the store. Charley, see what you can do with those windows. Chris
+and I will clean out. Bring a broom, Walt."
+
+When Walter got back with his arms full of bundles he found the shack
+wet inside but clean, the windows shining brightly, and his comrades
+nowhere in sight.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+THE FIRST ALARM.
+
+
+THE shack contained a rough board cupboard in one corner and a few
+shelves along one side and upon these Walter arranged his purchases
+which made quite an imposing array. He had bought carefully but there
+had been many things that the four of them absolutely had to have.
+There was a change of rough, cheap clothing for each, four blankets,
+the same of oilskins, four lanterns, a belt and sheath-knife apiece,
+and a stock of groceries; this was small, containing only such staples
+as rice, coffee, sugar, salt, beans, bacon, and flour, for he figured
+that they would get most of their living from the sea.
+
+His packages arranged to his satisfaction, Walter sat down to await the
+appearance of his chums.
+
+Charley was the first to arrive. He came out from the shore, staggering
+under a great load of clean, silver Spanish moss.
+
+"For our beds," he explained, as he spread the soft hair-like stuff on
+the floor in one corner. "It will take a little of the hardness off the
+boards."
+
+Captain Westfield soon appeared bearing a large box partly filled with
+sand.
+
+"What is that for?" Walter inquired.
+
+"That's our stove," the old sailor explained. "It will have to do us
+until we are able to buy one. Chris is coming with some wood."
+
+The little darkey soon appeared, bearing a load of driftwood that he
+had picked up on the beach.
+
+"I reckon you-alls can fix up things widout me," he observed as he
+deposited his burden just outside the door and produced a bit of string
+and a fish hook from his pocket. "Dar jis' naturally oughter be lots ob
+fish around dese old dock posts. A mess of dem, fried nice an' brown,
+would sho' go powerful good for supper."
+
+Charley grinned, for Chris loved to fish with all the ardor of his
+race. "Go ahead," he said, "we will get along without you."
+
+The little negro needed no second permission, and baiting his hook
+with a piece of bacon, and getting astride of a post, he began to fish
+earnestly.
+
+The others occupied themselves in trying to make their new home as
+comfortable as they could with the little they had to do with. They
+spread their four blankets on the pile of moss, filled and trimmed
+their lanterns, made a rough table and some benches out of a few boards
+they found on the dock, and covered the broken panes in the windows
+with some sand-fly netting Walter had bought at the store. When all
+this was done and their new garments hung up on nails, the rude shack
+took on quite a comfortable, home-like appearance.
+
+"It's not so bad," Charley observed. "It will do us very well until we
+can get better quarters."
+
+"We have cause to be thankful," Walter agreed. "Only a few hours ago
+we had nothing in the world, now, we have got a dry place to stay,
+clothes, a supply of food, and a prospect of soon making money."
+
+The chums' further conversation was interrupted by a rumble of a wagon
+and a hail from the dock. It was the man with their nets.
+
+"Better put them inside your house until you are ready to use them," he
+advised. "The nets all look alike and some one might steal them from
+you if you left them outside. I'll be out again in about half an hour
+with your boats, they are anchored up the beach a way."
+
+The boys awaited his return with eagerness for they were anxious to
+view their new crafts. Soon they heard the quick snapping of an engine
+and a large launch swung out from the beach with a string of skiffs in
+tow.
+
+"My, she can move some," Charley cried as she swept towards them with a
+froth of foam at her bow.
+
+"She's got good lines," announced Captain Westfield, with the certainty
+born of his sailor life, "she is bound to be a good sea boat with that
+shape."
+
+When within a hundred feet of where the boys stood on the dock, the
+man threw off the switch and the graceful craft glided up alongside.
+Charley caught the line the man threw, took a couple of half hitches
+around a post, and the three clambered aboard.
+
+"By gum, she's a beauty," exclaimed Captain Westfield with delight as
+he finished his inspection.
+
+"You're right," agreed the man, pleased with the old sailor's approval,
+"she's one of the best in the fleet. There's only two or three that can
+run away from her, and she is a peach in a seaway--just like a duck.
+She is thirty feet over all and sound as a dollar. You will find that
+cozy little cabin will come in pretty nice in bad weather. Few fish
+boats have one. Which one of you is going to run her?"
+
+"Not me," said Captain Westfield, decidedly. "I've dealt with sailing
+crafts all my life and I'm not hankering to start monkeying with
+engines at my age."
+
+"Both my chum and I would like to learn how to run the engine," Charley
+said, "so if anything should happen to one of us the other would know
+what to do."
+
+"All right," the man agreed. "All I can teach you are the principles,
+you will have to learn to run it by yourself. A gas engine is a thing
+you have to learn by experience. No two engines are exactly alike. Each
+has its own peculiarities which one has to become acquainted with. The
+principles are quite simple. There are only three elements, oil, gas
+and the spark. See this little valve here? You turn that and it lets
+the gasoline into this little tank--called a carburetter. This other
+little valve lets air into the same tank to mix with the gas. Now your
+gas is on ready to start. See these wires, they lead from four dry
+battery cells to the switch and from the switch to this plug in the
+head of the engine called the spark plug. Shove on your switch,--that's
+right. Now your gas and spark are ready. To start, now, all you have
+got to do is to rock this big fly wheel a couple of times then throw it
+over quickly. To stop, just throw off your switch. As soon as you stop,
+shut off your gas. Keep that oil cup filled. It lubricates the engine.
+Be careful with matches and lights when your gas is turned on--you
+can't be too careful." He clambered up on the dock. "Good-by and good
+luck to you," he called.
+
+"Hold on," cried Charley, in dismay. "You are not going off and leave
+us this way, are you?"
+
+"Boss's orders," grinned the man. "I can't be with you always. You have
+got to learn to run her for yourself sooner or later."
+
+The boys sat down and gazed at each other in consternation as the man
+disappeared up the dock, then Charley grinned as the humor of it struck
+him. "It's up to us," he chuckled, "unless the captain will help us
+out."
+
+Captain Westfield shook his head, decidedly. "You are the engineers,"
+he said, firmly. "I can't make head or tail of that dinky heap of iron.
+'Pears to me though that the man said something about turning one of
+those things there."
+
+"He did," said Charley, with mild sarcasm. "He also mentioned several
+other things. Well, here goes for a try."
+
+He rolled up his sleeves and started to work. At the end of half an
+hour, he was still turning the big fly wheel and puffing and perspiring
+much to the delight of a crowd of fishermen who had quit work for the
+day and had gathered at the dock's edge offering free comments and
+suggestions.
+
+"He'll sure wear that fly wheel out," observed one in a perfectly
+audible voice.
+
+"Put rowlocks in her and get a pair of oars, young fellow," suggested
+another.
+
+Charley stood the chaffing nobly but at last he was obliged to stop for
+breath.
+
+"I'm sure I don't know what's the matter with the thing," he declared.
+"It had ought to go. I've cranked it until I've got blisters on my
+hands."
+
+"Maybe, if you put on the switch it will go," Walter observed.
+
+Charley glared at him. "And you have been sitting there laughing in
+your sleeves while I've been working myself to death," he spluttered.
+
+"Mr. Daniels wants us to find out such little things for ourselves,"
+observed Walter, grinning.
+
+Charley forced a smile. "Well, I'll let you find out a few things,
+yourself, while I rest."
+
+"Is the entertainment over for the day?" queried one of the fishermen.
+
+"No, it's just going to begin," Charley prophesied with a grin.
+
+"Oh, I can start it all right," Walter declared, confidently. "Just
+watch me and I'll show you how."
+
+He turned on the switch, rocked the fly wheel a couple of times, then
+threw it over with a quick jerk. The engine started with a sharp
+snapping like a quick fire gun.
+
+"There, I've started her," he yelled, proudly, above the din.
+
+"That is not the way she was built to run," shouted Charley, while a
+roar of laughter went up from the assembled fishermen, for, instead of
+going ahead, the "Dixie" had started astern full speed. Charley who was
+standing ready to cast off took a quick turn of the line around a cleat
+and stopped her in her backward career. "Stop!" he cried, "or she'll
+break the line."
+
+But Walter was thoroughly bewildered and stood gazing helplessly at the
+popping machinery.
+
+"Pour water on it, that's the way to stop it," jeered a fisherman.
+
+"Throw your switch," Charley advised. Walter, recovering his wits,
+obeyed and the popping instantly ceased.
+
+"Well, I made the engine go, anyway," he replied to Charley's jeers.
+"I'll get her going all right yet."
+
+Again he threw the fly wheel only to have her rear back on the line.
+
+"Don't tow the dock away," begged a fisherman. "We all live here. We
+don't want to lose our home."
+
+"Tell you what to do, young fellow," advised another, "just change your
+rudder and put it on the other end."
+
+Walter, very red in the face, threw off the switch.
+
+"Throw the fly wheel over the other way and she'll go ahead," Charley
+said.
+
+"Hump!" Walter grunted, as he realized his error, "why didn't you tell
+me that before?"
+
+"Mr. Daniels wants us to find out such little things for ourselves,"
+observed Charley, sweetly.
+
+Walter laughed. "You're even with me now," he said. "Well, I guess,
+between us, we can learn to run her, but I guess we had better call
+it quits for to-day. It's getting late. Let's anchor her out for the
+night."
+
+Charley agreed and they poled the launch away from the dock and cast
+the anchor, returning to the wharf in one of the skiffs. It was nearly
+dark when they entered the shack to find a most disagreeable surprise
+awaiting them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE WARNING.
+
+
+CHRIS had started a brisk fire in the box of sand and was preparing to
+fry a big mess of fish which had fallen victims to his craft.
+
+"Golly!" he exclaimed when the boys offered their assistance, "I doan
+want none ob you white chillens foolin' around an' spoilin' dese fish.
+If you-alls wants to help, jes' light up de lanterns an' sot de table."
+
+Charley groped around, found the matches, and struck a light. "Why
+didn't you get more than one lantern, Walt?" he complained. "We will
+need four when we get to fishing."
+
+"I bought four. They are hanging right there on the wall," his chum
+replied.
+
+"There's only one here," Charley announced. "Are you sure you got four?"
+
+"Of course," Walter replied. "Maybe some of us moved them, when we were
+fixing up the shack."
+
+But a close search of the shack failed to reveal the missing lights.
+
+"They have been stolen," Charley said, quietly. "We had better look and
+see if anything else has been taken."
+
+But Walter was already looking over his purchases. "Nearly all our
+groceries are gone," he cried.
+
+The band of chums gazed at each other in dismay.
+
+"It must have been done while we were working with the launch," Charley
+said. "Chris, did you see any one go into the shack?"
+
+"No, Massa Chas," the little negro confessed. "De fish was jes'
+naturally biting so fast dat I doan look around much."
+
+"What shall we do about it?" Walter inquired.
+
+"I don't see as we can do anything," said Charley, thoughtfully. "We
+will just have to grin and bear it and be more careful in the future.
+Of course, it was one of those fishermen who did it, there was no one
+else on the dock,--but we have no clue as to which was the guilty one
+and we can not accuse all of them."
+
+"Wisely said, my lad," approved Captain Westfield, "all we can do is to
+keep quiet and watch out in the future. We evidently have some tough
+characters for neighbors. Let's not mourn and get downhearted, that
+won't bring the things back. Here Chris has got a good supper ready.
+Let's get at it and be cheerful."
+
+The boys recognizing the wisdom of the old sailor's advice, and hiding
+their disappointment, they made merry over the crisp, tasty, fried
+fish, pancakes, and coffee that the little negro had prepared.
+
+As soon as the supper things were cleared away, Captain Westfield
+produced his old worn, well-loved Bible and read the story of Christ
+with the discouraged fishermen, after which he prayed earnestly and
+with simple faith for the Lord's blessing upon them in the new life
+upon which they were about to enter.
+
+Just as he concluded, there came the sound of shuffling footsteps
+outside, and a bit of rustling white paper was shoved in under the door
+of the shack.
+
+Charley picked it up and glanced at the ill-written scrawl it
+contained. With an angry gleam in his eyes, he flung open the door and
+peeped outside. The retreating footsteps had died away, and he could
+distinguish nothing in the inky darkness but the glimmering lights in
+the other shacks.
+
+He closed and fastened the door carefully.
+
+"What was it?" Walter asked, noting the grim, set look on his chum's
+face.
+
+"Nothing much," Charley replied with a meaning glance. "I'll tell you
+about it later."
+
+As soon as Chris, who was always early to bed, was snoring peacefully
+on his blanket, Charley produced the scrap of paper.
+
+"What do you think of that?" he asked, briefly.
+
+Walter and the captain bent their heads over the almost illegible
+scrawl.
+
+Walter looked up from the paper, his face flushed with anger. "It's an
+outrage!" he cried. "Why I'd die first."
+
+"Read it to me, Walt," requested the Captain. "I can't make out that
+writing."
+
+Walter obeyed.
+
+ "Strangers,
+
+ "We-alls don't allow no niggers around hyar. Get rid of
+ that little nigger you've got with you or it will be
+ worse for him and worse for you.
+
+ "The White Caps."
+
+The old sailor fairly exploded with wrath as he listened. "By the keel
+of the Flying Dutchman," he shouted, "that little darkey is better than
+a shipload of thieving fishermen. I just wish I had my hands on the
+fellow that dared write that thing."
+
+"Poor little Chris," Walter exclaimed. "He is as noble a little fellow
+as ever lived. His skin may be black but he's white, clean white,
+inside. Think of the times he's risked his life for us and how good,
+honest and uncomplaining he has always been. Get rid of Chris, never!"
+
+"Of course not," Charley agreed. "The question is what are we going to
+do. I wouldn't say anything about it while Chris was awake because I
+knew how terribly bad it would make him feel,--he is a sensitive little
+fellow, but what are we going to do? The fellow or fellows, who wrote
+this are liable to do something to him at the first good opportunity
+they have, especially if he is not warned and on his guard."
+
+"Give up all idea of fishing and leave this place, before we part with
+Chris," declared Captain Westfield.
+
+"Not much," cried Walter. "Just tell those fishermen, one and all, that
+Chris stays with us. And if they do him the slightest injury, we will
+make them suffer for it."
+
+"I don't like either course you propose," observed thoughtful,
+clear-headed Charley. "As for the Captain's plan, I don't want to leave
+here. We have a good prospect of making money here if we can stick it
+out and we are in poor shape to pick up and leave. Besides I don't like
+the idea of being forced out of a place by any one. I don't think much
+better of what Walt proposes either. We are no match for a hundred
+fishermen, and it is foolish to make threats when one can not carry
+them out. In the second place, if we quarrel with the fishermen over
+Chris, it will make them more bitter against him and more certain to do
+him an injury. Lastly, nothing we could do to them for an injury done
+Chris would help him any after the injury was done. What we need to do
+is to protect him from any possible harm."
+
+"Well, let's have your plan," Walter said.
+
+"I have none as yet," Charley confessed. "I propose we wait until
+morning before we decide on any course. Some plan will occur to us, I
+am sure. There is always a way out of any difficulty if one only thinks
+hard enough. I am dead tired and I'm going to bed and try to forget
+about this trouble until morning. I'd advise you two to do the same."
+
+It had been a very full and eventful day and Walter and the Captain
+were not loath to follow Charley's example. The three crept into their
+blankets and turned out the lantern; but, tired as they were, they were
+not to get the sleep they longed for. From the other shacks came the
+voices of their occupants gradually increasing in number and volume.
+At first, it seemed as though a kind of celebration was in progress;
+for the sound of laughter, songs, and dancing filled the air, but
+gradually, the uproar took on a rougher note. Voices were raised in
+anger, curses were bandied back and forth, and now and then came the
+sound of fighting.
+
+"I believe they are all drunk or fast getting drunk," Charley declared.
+
+"Why, I understood Mr. Daniels to say that this was a dry town and
+that no liquor was allowed in the place," said his chum.
+
+"Yes, and he also said that there was more liquor drunk here than in
+any other town in the state," Charley amended. "He says it's a mystery
+where it comes from. The town authorities it seems, keep a close watch
+for blind tigers and also keep an eye on the packages that come by
+freight and express but none of it seems to come in that way."
+
+"Well, it evidently comes in some way," remarked Captain Westfield as a
+fresh uproar of fighting arose from the dock.
+
+It was useless to try to sleep as long as the din continued, so the
+three lay talking in low tones.
+
+"Hark!" cried Charley, suddenly. "I wonder what they have done now."
+
+Loud and clear above the din of fighting rang the sharp crack of a
+pistol. The report was followed by excited shouting and then silence.
+
+"I'll bet one of them has been shot and it has frightened and sobered
+up the rest," Walter exclaimed. "Let's go out and see."
+
+"No, you don't, lad," Captain Westfield declared, firmly. "You'll stay
+here if I have to hold you. It's none of our trouble and we don't any
+of us want to get mixed up in it."
+
+Whatever had happened, it had effectually quieted the wild revelry.
+Our little party lay for awhile listening but the silence remained
+unbroken and one by one, they at last dropped off to sleep.
+
+It was perhaps midnight when Walter raised up on his elbow and
+whispered softly.
+
+"Are you asleep, Charley?"
+
+"As wide awake as I ever was in my life," his chum grunted. "Why,
+anything the matter with you?"
+
+"Something is stinging me to death," declared Walter, anxiously, "I
+smart, burn, and itch all over."
+
+"Me too," chimed in the captain's voice, "I've laid quiet here and took
+it rather than wake you boys up. Jehosaphat, what is it?"
+
+Charley chuckled. "It's nothing dangerous," he explained, "evidently
+we are entertaining a few thousand of those fishermen's closest
+friends--bedbugs. Light up the lantern, Walt, and let's have a look."
+
+An examination by the light showed their faces and bodies covered with
+red, angry-looking blotches.
+
+"There's no use trying to sleep here," Charley declared. "Let's go out
+on board the 'Dixie.' It will be pretty close quarters sleeping in her
+cabin but anything is better than this."
+
+"But our things will be all stolen," Walter objected.
+
+"They will not bother anything to-night for they will think we are
+inside, and we will be back before they are up in the morning," said
+his chum.
+
+Chris was awakened and the four crept softly out of the shack closing
+the door carefully behind them.
+
+To reach their skiff, they had to pass the other shacks. As they came
+opposite the first one Charley, who was in the lead, stopped short with
+a muffled cry of horror.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+FRIENDLY ADVICE.
+
+
+THE moon had arisen while they slept and now shining brightly
+down clearly revealed the fearsome object stretched on the planks
+at Charley's feet. It was a man lying flat on his back, his arms
+outstretched, and his face upturned to the stars.
+
+"Dead, murdered!" Charley cried, softly.
+
+"Perhaps he is only drunk," suggested his chum in a tense whisper.
+
+But Charley silently pointed to a gaping hole in the man's forehead and
+the dark pool on the wharf at his head.
+
+The captain, stooping, felt of the man's wrist, raised his arm and let
+it drop. "Yes, he is cold, dead, and stiff," he whispered. "Let us get
+away from here. We can do him no good."
+
+In a few minutes, the four were huddled in the "Dixie's" cabin,
+talking over the tragedy with bated breath. They were not strangers to
+the sight of death. In the course of the adventurous lives they had
+lived, they had often seen the coming of the gristly monster, but the
+suddenness of this sight had upset their nerves already overtaxed by
+the events of the previous day and the night, and it was long before
+they could compose themselves to sleep.
+
+Just as Walter was dropping off into dreamland, Charley nudged him with
+his elbow. "I've got it," he whispered, softly.
+
+"What?" inquired Walter, drowsily.
+
+"A plan to avoid trouble with the fishermen and keep Chris from all
+harm."
+
+"Let's hear it," demanded his chum, rousing up a little.
+
+"Wait until morning. I haven't thought out all the details yet. Get to
+sleep if you can. We'll need all the rest we can get for to-morrow is
+going to be a busy day."
+
+It seemed to the weary little party that they had hardly closed their
+eyes when they were awakened by the sun shining in the cabin windows.
+
+Hastily dressing, they got aboard the skiff and made for the dock.
+
+There was a crowd gathered in front of the shacks and they clambered up
+on the wharf unobserved.
+
+Beside the fishermen, Mr. Daniels was standing in the group and with
+him was a stocky, determined-looking man, wearing a revolver, whom the
+boys took to be a sheriff.
+
+"Good morning, friends," called Mr. Daniels when he caught sight of the
+little party. "Come here. Perhaps you can tell us something about last
+night's affair. These fellows here seem to know nothing about it."
+
+Briefly, Captain Westfield told the little they knew of the trouble.
+
+"That don't help us much," observed the sheriff, when he had concluded.
+"As long as these fishermen will not talk it is going to be hard to
+locate the murderer. The man who was killed was a pretty bad egg,
+although that does not excuse the murderer. I wish I could find out
+where that whiskey comes from. It is that which causes all the trouble."
+
+It was on Walter's tongue to tell Mr. Daniels of their own troubles but
+he remembered the fish boss's declaration that they must fight their
+own battles and he checked himself.
+
+The sheriff soon left, taking with him as suspects a couple of
+fishermen who were known to have quarreled with the dead man the day
+before. Before he left, however, he addressed the assembled fishermen.
+
+"Now," he said, firmly, "these affairs among you have got to stop and
+stop right now. Most of you men are not bad at heart. It's the liquor
+makes you crazy and ready to follow the lead of the reckless ones. I
+don't know where you get the booze but I am going to find out and the
+guilty ones are going to suffer. I'll give you a chance to come square
+with it. I'll give a reward of five hundred dollars to the man who puts
+me next to this booze business, and promise him that he will not be
+punished unless he is one of the main offenders. You know where I live.
+I am ready to talk any time to the man who will come to me and help me
+put an end to the accursed business."
+
+None of the fishermen spoke but it was evident that the mention of
+the large reward was not without some effect. Some faces showed eager
+cupidity while others betrayed great uneasiness.
+
+"That reward offer is a bomb in their midst," whispered the observant
+Charley to his chum. "Some of those fellows will squeal to the sheriff
+unless they are too afraid of what the rest would do to them. I guess
+those that look so uneasy are the guilty ones, they have cause to be
+scared. Five hundred dollars is a big temptation for some one to turn
+state's evidence. But come, we have no time to stand around. We have
+got lots to do to-day. Chris, will you see if you can rustle us up a
+little breakfast?"
+
+"Now for our own troubles," he continued as soon as the little negro
+was out of hearing. "We all know now that we can not stay here. If
+those fellows will kill one of their own comrades, they certainly
+would not hesitate to do the same to Chris or one of us if they got a
+good chance. So we must get away from here at once. As soon as we eat
+breakfast, let's get all our things on the 'Dixie' and pull out. I've a
+sort of plan in my head for a new home but first I want to go over to
+the Roberts camp and have a little talk with them. There are several
+things I want to find out. Before we go, though, I want to say a few
+words to these fishermen."
+
+The fishermen were still standing as the sheriff had left them, talking
+excitedly together and Charley approached the group. "Men," he said in
+a clear, manly voice, "please give me your attention for a moment." A
+surprised silence fell upon the group, and the lad was quick to take
+advantage of it.
+
+"We only landed in this place yesterday. We came here broke, seeking
+a chance only to work and earn. Mr. Daniels was kind enough to give
+us that chance. We have started in strangers to all of you and with
+no malice or ill feeling towards any of you. Last night we received a
+note signed the White Caps stating that we must get rid of our little
+colored cook or suffer serious consequences. Now suppose, men, that you
+had a friend who for years had been faithful, loyal and true to you.
+Suppose that he had again and again risked his life for you. Would you
+turn him down at some one else's demand, even if his skin was black?
+Could you do it and retain an atom of your own self respect? No, you
+could not. Nor can we. That little darkey has been all of those things
+to us for many years and we can not and will not turn him adrift. You,
+or some of you, object to his presence on this dock. Very well, we will
+leave the dock. He will not bother you even with his presence. All we
+ask is that if you come across him elsewhere at any time that you do
+him no harm. We appeal to your sense of fair play. We do not believe
+any American lacks that sense. We ask this not through fear but because
+it is right and just."
+
+A murmur ran through the group of fishermen when the lad concluded and
+turning around walked back to his friends. He had little hopes that his
+words had done any good but the chance had seemed worth the attempt.
+
+Chris soon called them to breakfast and as soon as it was finished, the
+boys brought the "Dixie" alongside and stored their belongings in her
+cabin.
+
+After a few attempts Charley succeeded in starting, the engine and
+with the captain at the wheel and their skiffs in tow behind, they
+swung away from the dock and headed across the bay for a little island
+on which stood the Roberts camp. As they approached the place, they
+were delighted with the looks of the little camp. They landed at a
+neat little wharf, on either side of which were neat, well-built net
+racks upon which were neatly hung well-mended nets. The skiffs hauled
+upon the shore were well-painted and in excellent shape. A trim little
+path bordered with sea shells led up up to a neat, cozy, white-painted
+cottage nestling in amongst a group of cocoanut palms.
+
+"These Roberts are tidy as sailors," observed Captain Westfield. "We
+can bank on their being pretty near all right. I never saw a clean,
+tidy man that was a bad man."
+
+As Charley had expected, they found the Roberts at home taking a needed
+day's rest after their hard work.
+
+They greeted the little party cordially. "Glad to see you," said Bill
+Roberts, heartily. "Hope that you will drop in on us often now that you
+have found the way."
+
+"We have come to bother you already," Charley said. "I thought perhaps
+you could tell us if there would be any objection to our making a camp
+on one of these islands."
+
+"What, tired of life on the dock already?" grinned Bill.
+
+Charley briefly related their experiences with the fishermen. Bill
+and his brothers, Frank and Robert, were indignant. "It's some of
+that Hunter gang's doings," Bill declared. "Most of the fishermen are
+not such bad fellows but they are afraid to oppose the gang for fear
+of what might be done to them on the sly. You have done just right
+to leave there, now, you won't be mixed up in any of their troubles.
+Sure you can make camp on any of these islands. They are owned by the
+state and no one has got any right to object. You could build a shack
+right here on our island but I've got a better idea than that. You see
+that island right over there opposite the Clearwater dock? That's Palm
+Island. There is a pretty fair abandoned house on it which with only a
+little fixing up would do you first rate. There's a good spring of cold
+water on it too. I'll take a run over there with you and show you where
+the spring is."
+
+The little party gratefully accepted his offer. Just as they were
+shoving off from the dock, the younger brother came running down with
+a rifle in his hands. "Better take this," he offered. "We have got an
+extra one and it may come handy to you. You can return it later on if
+you find you have no use for it."
+
+Our friends thanked him for his kindness. A weapon was what they had
+been longing for since their acquaintance with the fishermen. They
+hoped to never have occasion to use one, but its possession gave them a
+sense of security.
+
+They were delighted with the little cabin and spring that Bill showed
+them on Palm Island. The island itself was a small one of about ten
+acres and densely covered with palms. It was long and narrow. One of
+its snow-white beaches fronted on the Gulf of Mexico and the other on
+the bay. The cabin was in a good state of repair, and the spring gushed
+up clear and cold from under a clump of rock.
+
+Their new friend soon took his departure giving them one last piece of
+advice before he went.
+
+"Better leave one man in camp all the time," he said. "It needs one to
+do the cooking and keep nets mended up, and it's best not to take any
+chances. That Hunter gang may drop in on you any time."
+
+As soon as he was gone, the little party fell to work fixing up their
+new home with which they were one and all delighted.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+THE MIDNIGHT LIGHT.
+
+
+"I WISH we could get to fishing right off," Charley observed, "but I
+believe it will pay us best to get everything fixed up right first,
+then we will have nothing to bother us and we will be able to fish
+steadily without any interruptions."
+
+"Issue your commands, boss, and they shall be carried out," Walter
+assured him.
+
+"The cabin is the first thing to be attended to. There isn't much
+fixing required, as I can see, except to clean it up a little. But we
+need something for beds, bare planks make pretty hard sleeping. How do
+you suppose some clean dry sea moss would do for couches?"
+
+"Just the thing," Captain Westfield declared. "I like the sweet salty
+smell of it. I'll bring some up from the beach, and clean up the house
+too, that's my job."
+
+"We had ought to have some kind of a fireplace to cook on," Charley
+continued. "It's a little trouble to build one, but there's lots of
+rock on the beach and it hadn't ought to take very long."
+
+"Dis nigger's goin' to 'tend to dat," announced Chris. "I'se de cook
+an' I knows jes' what kind ob oven I wants. I'se goin' to see if I
+can't find something to eat too. We ain't got but mighty little grub
+left an' we best save it all we can."
+
+"Well, Walter and I will try to manage the rest of the work, then. Come
+on, Walt, we have got to build a small dock and racks for our nets."
+
+There was plenty of driftwood on the beach and with proper tools the
+two boys would have taken but a short time to complete their tasks, but
+the only implements they possessed were their sheath knives.
+
+"This is a case where necessity has got to be the mother of invention,"
+Charley observed. "Let's pick out our driftwood as near of the same
+length as we can, that will save some cutting which would be an almost
+impossible job without saw or axe. We had better tackle the dock job
+first because it's the hardest. Let's see--we will want six stout
+pieces for posts, three others for cross pieces, and a lot of planks
+for the top."
+
+Although the driftwood was plentiful, it took the boys some time to
+find just what they wanted and carry it all to the place they had
+decided to have their wharf.
+
+"Now comes the hardest part of the job," Charley announced, as they
+dumped their last load on the sand. "That is to get our posts set. I
+don't see any way to do but get overboard and work them down by hand."
+
+"Here goes, then," said Walter, beginning to shed his clothing.
+
+The water was not very deep and the boys stood one of the posts upright
+and attempted to work the end down into the bottom by swaying the top
+back and forth.
+
+"It's no go," panted Walter after half an hour of hard labor which only
+sank the post a few inches in the hard sand. "It would take us ten
+years to put them all far enough down to hold."
+
+"I expect we will have to give up the dock for the present," Charley
+agreed, ruefully. "Too bad. Of course one is not absolutely necessary
+but it would save us a good deal of trouble and also wet feet."
+
+"It is lucky that your assistant is a person of great intelligence,"
+Walter observed, slyly. "Your methods are primitive, clumsy, hand-labor
+methods. This is an age of machinery and brains. Now, if I were boss
+of this, job, I would call in the aid of machinery to replace the hand
+methods which have been tried and found wanting."
+
+"I resign as superintendent in your favor," Charley grinned. "There is
+more honor than pay attached to the position, anyway. It will be a good
+opening for you. You will be able to say in future years that you held
+at least one position where you were not paid more than you were worth."
+
+"Your words are prompted by intellectual jealousy," declared his chum,
+calmly. "However, it is the misfortune of the truly great not to be
+appreciated until they are dead. If you will bring the launch in
+here, I'll explain my plan so simply that a child, or even you, can
+understand it."
+
+Charley, deciding that he was getting the worst of the good-natured
+banter, obediently waded out and brought the launch in.
+
+"I don't know whether you are well enough acquainted with engines to
+realize it," mocked Walter, who had only made the discovery himself
+that morning, "but the cylinder of this engine, as you will see when I
+point it out, is inclosed in a hollow iron jacket. This thing down here
+is a pump, and you will notice that there is one pipe running from it
+down through the bottom of the boat and also another pipe leading into
+the jacket. Observe also that there is a short piece of pipe in the
+jacket to which is fastened a piece of hose that runs out over the side
+of the boat. Do you take in all that?"
+
+"I do," said Charley, briefly.
+
+"All right, though I am quite surprised. Now, when the engine is
+running that pump sucks up water through the pipe that goes through the
+bottom of the boat. The water is forced through the other pipe into the
+jacket and passes overboard again through the short pipe and hose. The
+constant circulation of cold water keeps the engine from heating up and
+exploding."
+
+"You know more about engines than I suspected yesterday," Charley said,
+dryly.
+
+"I know many things that would surprise you," observed Walter, calmly.
+"Now, I will show you how simple it is for a brainy person to make
+practical use of such things. Now, we'll just fasten the end of that
+hose to the end of the post and start up the engine. The force of the
+expelled water will wash away the sand from below the post permitting
+it to sink."
+
+"Yes, and you will start the engine the wrong way and pump the poor
+post out of the water," Charley jeered.
+
+"The superintendent does not stoop to manual labor," replied Walter,
+calmly. "I shall simply order my assistant to start the engine."
+
+The joke was on Charley and he owned it by starting up the engine
+without further parley.
+
+"Now get overboard and hold the post steady," Walter commanded, and his
+chum meekly obeyed.
+
+The idea was really an excellent one. The post sank rapidly and in
+an hour all six were sunk to the required depth. Charley labored in
+the water with suspicious willingness while Walter, bare-backed, sat
+proudly and comfortably in the launch tending the switch and giving
+orders with sarcastic comments on the worker's ability. From time to
+time, Charley glanced up with a malicious grin at him sitting in naked
+state by the engine. That grin made Walter uneasy, for it was not often
+that he got the best of his chum in a joke and Charley's meekness was
+suspicious.
+
+"Now for the cross pieces. Put them on next," he ordered. "By jove, how
+are we going to fasten them though. We have got no nails or hammer."
+
+"This is an age of machinery and brains," quoted Charley. "Surely my
+brilliant superintendent can overcome such a little difficulty."
+
+Walter puzzled for a few minutes. "I'll have to give up," he admitted.
+"I resign as superintendent. Give your orders, Mr. Super and I'll
+execute them." He flopped over the launch's side into the water.
+
+"Ouch!" he yelled. "What's the matter with this water? It smarts me
+like fire."
+
+"There's nothing the matter with the water," grinned Charley, "it is
+just nice, cool, clear sea water. I am enjoying it. The salt in it does
+not agree with a badly sunburned back, however."
+
+"My! I should say it doesn't," agreed his chum, as the reason for the
+smarting dawned upon him. "Now laugh. Go ahead, don't mind my feelings.
+I am not sensitive."
+
+And thus with good-natured banter, the two boys made light work of
+their heavy, disagreeable task.
+
+Charley solved the lack of nails and hammer, by plaiting some stout
+ropes of cocoanut fiber with which he securely bound the cross pieces
+in place. After that it was only a few minutes' task to lay on the
+planks for the top and their wharf was completed.
+
+The net racks gave them less trouble, as they consisted merely of two
+poles about four feet apart set up on posts.
+
+By noon, the boys' tasks were completed and they repaired to the cabin
+where they found that the captain and Chris had not wasted their time.
+The cabin had been made neat and clean and in each corner was a great
+heap of dry fragrant sea moss upon which their blankets were already
+spread.
+
+Just outside the door, Chris had cunningly constructed a kind of rude,
+flat-topped stove out of rocks, and the fragrant odors coming from it
+caused the boys to quicken their steps.
+
+"My, Chris, if that dinner tastes as good as it smells, it will be all
+right," Charley said.
+
+The little negro beamed with delight. "Trust dis nigger to git plenty
+to eat," he grinned. "Don't make no difference if dat poor white trash
+steals all the grub, dis nigger can get up a good meal all right. I'se
+just got up a kind of feast to-day 'cause hit's our first meal on de
+Island."
+
+And a feast it truly was. First came a thick soup or stew that was
+delicious. "What's this, Chris?" Charley asked, as he smacked his lips
+over the first spoonful. "It's a new one on me."
+
+"Dem's stewed scallops. I find lots of dem on the flats," declared the
+delighted little negro. "Dey are powerful hard to open an' clean, but
+dey sure beat oysters all hollow for tastiness. Don't eat too much ob
+dem, Massa Chas, 'cause dar's lots ob other things comin' yet."
+
+The next dish was a large fish baked until the juicy meat was dropping
+from the bones. With it came the tender, baked bud of a palmetto
+cabbage, and great red, boiled claws of stone crabs. To top off with,
+there were golden brown, feather-weight flap-jacks with syrup and
+white, milky cocoa plums.
+
+The little party ate like cannibals, while Chris urged more upon them,
+tickled with the success of the feast he had prepared.
+
+"I hate to quit, but I haven't got room for another mouthful," Charley
+declared, at last. "Come on, Walt, stop it. There is more work to do
+this afternoon and I don't want to do it all by myself. Besides you are
+going to get another meal to-night."
+
+"That's right, begrudge me a few mouthfuls of food," grumbled Walter as
+he rose slowly and painfully from the table.
+
+The afternoon was busily spent in putting their nets on the racks,
+overhauling the skiffs, and making themselves more familiar with the
+launch's engine. Night found all hands tired and sleepy. As soon as
+supper was over, they stretched out on their soft spicy couches ready
+to get back the sleep they had lost the night before.
+
+At midnight Charley sat up suddenly wide awake. For a moment he sat
+still and alert. Everything was quiet. Yet he knew that something
+unusual had occurred to rouse him from his sound slumber. This sudden
+awakening was a habit bred by his adventurous life amid the perils of
+sea and forest. Silently he waited, every nerve alert, to sense what
+had happened. At last it came again, a deep, mellow, horn-like sound.
+One, two, three times it vibrated on the still night air, then came
+silence again.
+
+Softly he crept over and awakened Walter and the captain. "I don't know
+what's the matter, but some one is signaling on a conch shell," he
+explained, "and the sound is not far off."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+THE MYSTERY.
+
+
+LEAVING Chris still peacefully snoring, the three stole softly outside
+the cabin. Once outside they paused and listened again for a repetition
+of the strange signal.
+
+They had not long to wait for in a few minutes, it came again, a long
+melodious mellow note, three times sounded.
+
+"It comes from the Gulf," Captain Westfield declared. "Let's go down to
+the point. We can see both bay and gulf from there."
+
+The island terminated in a long sand point that ran out into a passage
+that connected the bay with the Gulf of Mexico. To it, the three
+hastened their steps. Just as they stepped out on the sand spit, the
+mysterious signal sounded again.
+
+"There it is," Charley cried, pointing out to sea. "It's a ship."
+
+Out in the Gulf, about three hundred yards from where they stood, a dim
+shadowy mass loomed up vaguely in the darkness.
+
+"It's a ship all right," Captain Westfield agreed, "but thar's
+something queer about her. No ship ever comes in close to these shores.
+With all the reefs thar are around hyar it's too dangerous unless one
+knows the channels mighty well. Then, that ain't no distress signal
+she's sounding,--four long blasts is the distress signal the world
+over. Then too she ain't got lights--that ain't proper and shipshape."
+
+Even as he spoke, a bright flash blazed up from the strange vessel's
+deck. It only lasted a few seconds, but in that brief space it lit up
+the mysterious stranger, showing a huddled mass of men in her waist and
+throwing into sharp distinctness every rope and spar.
+
+"A flare," cried Walter, "they are certainly signaling some one."
+
+"There is something familiar about those spars," Charley exclaimed.
+"Did you notice them, Captain?"
+
+"No. I was looking at the hull. She sits low as a pirate craft. She's
+schooner rigged and about one hundred tons burden. Hallo! Here comes
+some one who has heard her signals. We can find out about her all
+right."
+
+From the bay came the quick chug chug of a motor turning up at full
+speed. As she swept into the passage, the little party could tell even
+in the dim light that she was a large launch and traveling at a rapid
+rate.
+
+"Ahoy!" hailed Charley, as the strange launch came abreast.
+
+The launch's engine was stopped at his call, but no answer came to his
+hail.
+
+"Ahoy!" he shouted again. "Can you tell us what ship that is and what
+she wants?"
+
+A string of low-muttered curses came from the launch, and almost at
+the same minute a single fiery rocket hissed aloft from her deck.
+Immediately her engine began to throb again.
+
+"Why, she's turned around and going back!" exclaimed Captain Westfield
+in amazement.
+
+"Look at the schooner!" cried Walter.
+
+From the mysterious ship came muffled orders and the creak of blocks as
+sails were hoisted and sheeted home.
+
+Slowly the put-put of the launch's engine died away in the distance
+from which it had come, and the mysterious schooner, under full sail,
+glided silently away in the darkness.
+
+"I'll be joggered!" exclaimed Captain Westfield. "That's queer. I
+wonder what they were up to."
+
+"Something that will not bear the light of day, I guess," said Charley,
+thoughtfully. "I believe it was our hail that frightened the fellows in
+the launch and their rocket was a signal to the schooner to clear out.
+Well, I guess the excitement is over for the night and we might as well
+go back to bed."
+
+Walter and the captain lay awake for some time discussing the
+strange incident but Charley lay long awake on his couch, silent and
+thoughtful. He was puzzling to determine where he had seen the strange
+schooner before. In the second, the flare had revealed her in the
+darkness, he had sensed something vaguely familiar in the low graceful
+hull and the set of the raking masts.
+
+"Where have I ever seen a foremast that raked aft like that one," he
+pondered. Suddenly it flashed vivid and distinct in his groping memory.
+"No, no," he muttered to himself. "It simply can't be her. It must only
+be a chance resemblance. That flare only lasted a second. Guess I am
+getting to imagine things. I'd better forget it and try to go to sleep."
+
+Never-the-less it was long before he rid his alert brain of the
+tormenting thought and compelled sleep to come.
+
+When he awoke, it was to find his chums up before him. Chris had
+breakfast cooking and Captain Westfield had just returned from taking
+a morning plunge in the surf. Walter was not in sight, but he soon
+appeared bearing a sack full of turtle eggs which he had found on the
+beach.
+
+"I've been exploring our island," he announced. "Say, some of the
+fishermen must come over here to hold their celebrations. There are
+several well-worn paths on the island. I followed two of them and
+they both led into the same place, a little clearing in a thick bunch
+of palms. It looks as though there had been several fights there for
+the ground is all trampled up as though it had been dug, and I found a
+couple of long, queer-looking clubs and this full bottle. What's in it,
+Charley? I can't make out the label."
+
+Charley took the big black bottle and examined the label that had
+puzzled his chum. "It's in Spanish," he announced, then translated
+rapidly: "Aguardiente, 100 Proof, Manufactured by Sicava & Sons,
+Santiago, Cuba." He pulled the cork and a pungent reeking odor filled
+the air.
+
+"Why, it's rum," said Captain Westfield.
+
+"A kind of rum," Charley agreed, "only far stronger and more fiery. No
+wonder the fishermen fight if this is the kind of stuff they drink. It
+would make a rabbit spit at an elephant."
+
+"Throw it away," Walter said. "We don't want the vile stuff."
+
+"No, I think I will keep it," said his chum, thoughtfully. "I have a
+notion that this little bottle is going to be mighty useful some time."
+
+"How's that?" Walter questioned, but the spell of silent thoughtfulness
+was still upon Charley and he paid no heed to the question.
+
+"I wish you fellows would go down and pull the nets into the skiffs,"
+he said, as soon as breakfast was over. "I will be down as soon as I
+take a dip in the surf."
+
+"Why, what do you want the nets on so early for?" Walter protested. "We
+don't fish except at night, do we?"
+
+"We need to have a little drill," Charley explained. "It will be easier
+for you to learn how to handle the nets in the day time, and we will
+not have to waste any of our precious night time practicing."
+
+As soon as the three were gone, Charley left the camp himself. He did
+not pause at the beach to take a swim, however. Instead he turned into
+one of the well-beaten paths Walter had spoken of. He was following
+up a vague suspicion that had been growing in his mind and, for good
+reasons, he wanted to follow it out alone. If he was right in his
+surmises then would be the time to tell his chums. There was no use of
+worrying them until he was certain.
+
+His keen eyes noted one peculiar thing that his chum had not observed
+the significance of. All the paths led inward from the gulf beach and
+none from the bay.
+
+A few minutes' walk brought him to the cleared place Walter had
+described. It was only a few feet in extent and was densely surrounded
+by a thick growth of cocoanut palms. No one a few feet distant would
+have suspected its existence so well was it hidden from sight.
+
+At the entrance to the little space, Charley picked up two heavy
+pieces of timber about six feet in length. "These are Walter's clubs,"
+he grinned. "Well, I suppose one could take them for that but clubs
+don't generally have a nice smooth rounded hand grip at each end and
+clubs the length of these things would be awkward to handle at close
+quarters. I have an idea these were used to carry heavy burdens. They
+would come pretty handy for that. Just lay the thing to be carried
+across them and one man take hold of the ends in front and another man
+at the back. Strange, Walter did not notice an odd thing about this
+clearing too. There is not a root or twig on the ground. Men would
+hardly fix up a place as clean just to fight in. He is right about one
+thing, though, this ground does look as though it had been all dug up,
+and unless all my guess is wrong, it has been dug up. Let's see how
+near I've hit to the mark with my suspicions."
+
+He got down on his knees and began to dig in the soft earth. In a few
+minutes he came upon that which he sought. It was not unexpected for
+all his theories had pointed the one way. As he dug over here and
+there, however, he grew amazed at the magnitude of his discovery. At
+last he ceased his digging and carefully filled up the many holes he
+had made trying to smooth over the face of the ground the same as it
+was before. This accomplished to his satisfaction, he stood up with a
+thoughtful frown on his face.
+
+Should he tell his companions of his discovery, he pondered. It was of
+no use to any of them at present. Would it be wise to tell them yet?
+Some one might let slip a word in an unguarded moment that would spoil
+everything. "The more that knows a secret the greater the chance of its
+leaking out," he reflected. "No," he would not tell them at present.
+
+Having reached this decision, he made his way back to the beach.
+Stripping, he took a hurried plunge in the surf and hastily dressing
+hurried across the island to the skiffs.
+
+"We have got the nets all aboard," Walter greeted him with.
+
+One glance at the heaped up nets in the skiffs' stern and Charley's
+face fell.
+
+"Whew!" he whistled, "you have sure done it now. Well, it's all my
+fault. I should have explained to you how to boat a net. They don't
+want to be piled up in a heap like that. You can't run out a net in
+that shape. It would all tangle up and go out in lumps and bunches.
+When you boat a net, you want to pile the lead line up carefully on
+one side of the stern and the cork line on the other letting the loose
+webbing fall in between, then it will run out smoothly without tangles
+and snarls."
+
+The nets had to be all tumbled out of the skiffs and hauled in again as
+Charley had directed.
+
+His chums were quite crestfallen over their mistake, but he only
+laughed. "Everything is new to you and you are bound to make a lot
+of mistakes at first," he assured them, "but you will soon catch on.
+Don't get discouraged over a little mistake like that, you'll make many
+bigger ones before you get used to the business. Hallo, I guess we are
+going to have some visitors. That launch out there is heading in here."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+THE VISITORS.
+
+
+THE boys glanced up from their work from time to time at the rapidly
+approaching motor boat.
+
+"My, but she is a fast one!" commented Charley, noting the crest of
+foam at her bow and the rapid popping of her exhaust. "I believe she is
+as fast, or faster, than our 'Dixie.'"
+
+Within a few minutes after they had sighted her, she was near enough
+for the chums to distinguish her passengers or crew.
+
+"Why, the man at the wheel is that fisherman Hunter," Walter exclaimed,
+"and there are four more with him, some of his gang, I suppose."
+
+"I wonder what they want with us," speculated the captain, uneasily.
+
+"Nothing pleasant, I guess," said Charley, gravely. "I believe those
+fellows are bent on making trouble for us. Let's not have any words
+with them, if we can help it. If we have got to have a fuss with 'em at
+all though, I guess now is as good a time as ever. I'll get Chris out
+of the way," he added, in an undertone to Walter. "He does not know
+yet that he is the innocent cause of our trouble, and there is no use
+letting him if we can help it. It would make the poor little chap feel
+awfully bad."
+
+As soon as it was apparent beyond all doubt that the launch was coming
+in to the little dock, he called the little negro to one side.
+
+"I want you to go up to the cabin and stay there until I call you," he
+directed. "If I give one long whistle, come a running and bring the
+rifle with you."
+
+The little negro was barely out of sight, when the big launch, its
+engine shut off, glided in to the dock.
+
+Besides the sallow-faced Hunter, it contained four fellows almost as
+vicious and mean looking as himself. Hunter made the launch fast to a
+post and climbed out on the dock followed by his companions.
+
+Our little party greeted the visitors with a pleasant good morning.
+
+"Good morning," grunted Hunter with a snarl, "I didn't come all the way
+over here just to say good morning though."
+
+"Then what did you come for?" demanded Walter curtly, his quick temper
+beginning to flare up at the fellow's insolent tones.
+
+"I am going to let you know mighty quick," snarled Hunter. "You
+brought that little nigger over here with you, didn't you?"
+
+"We did," Charley answered briefly.
+
+"Well, you-all have got to get off this island--and get off of it
+mighty quick," he declared.
+
+"Why," Captain Westfield demanded, his own anger beginning to rise.
+
+"First place, 'cause you ain't got any right to stay here. This island
+belongs to a friend of mine and I've got charge of it."
+
+Charley was keeping his temper well in hand though he was as angry
+as his chums. "We have been advised that this island belongs to the
+state," he said, coolly, "and we believe what we have been told. We
+have got as much right on state land as you or any one else."
+
+"Well, I give you notice to get off right away. We don't allow no
+niggers in the fishing business 'round hyar."
+
+"Now look here, Hunter," Charley said coolly, "you fellows objected to
+our having the little negro with us on the dock. Very well, we moved
+over here to avoid trouble. Now you come over here and try to order us
+off this island which we have as many rights to as you. That's going
+too far and we are not going to stand for it."
+
+"We ain't going to have no niggers fishing 'round hyar," repeated
+Hunter doggedly.
+
+"Chris is not going to do any fishing. He is our cook--and a mighty
+good one too."
+
+"Don't make any difference. You fellows have got to get off this
+island."
+
+"Which we refuse to do," Charley said defiantly.
+
+"Amen to that," agreed Captain Westfield, hotly.
+
+"You'll have a hard job making us," chimed in Walter.
+
+Hunter's sallow face reddened with anger. "If you smart Alecks ain't
+off this island before to-morrow night you'll get what's coming to
+you," he snarled.
+
+"Look here, Hunter," Charley said, quietly, "it strikes me you are a
+little bit too anxious to get us to leave here and I think I know the
+reason. Now you fellows had better get in your boat and go. We want
+nothing to do with you and your gang. We will tend to our own business
+and you had better tend to yours. If you bother us any more, well, I
+know of an officer who would be willing to pay a good big sum to know
+about a strange craft that haunts this coast in the night, and a motor
+boat that answers her signals."
+
+It was a chance shot on Charley's part but it went home.
+
+"We wasn't out at all last night," denied Hunter. "We were all in bed,
+didn't even go fishing."
+
+"I never mentioned last night," said Charley, quickly, and Hunter
+muttered a curse as he saw the slip he had made.
+
+"You're only doing a lot of wild guessing, and guessing ain't proof,"
+he snarled. "Take all the guesses you want to your officer. He won't do
+anything. He's got to have proofs."
+
+Charley realized with regret that his veiled threat had failed, but he
+tried not to show his chagrin.
+
+"Leave here," he ordered. "Get into your boat and go."
+
+"I'm leaving right now," Hunter snarled. "But you'll be leaving here
+for good before two days are gone. Before I go, I'm going to slap you
+around a bit to teach you some manners, you young whelp. Look out for
+them other two, boys, while I give this smart Aleck a dressing down."
+
+His companions drawing their sheath knives, crowded threateningly
+towards Walter and the captain while he lunged forward at Charley who
+stood his ground a little pale but unafraid. He came at the lad with a
+rush, both fists swinging. "Keep back," Charley cried, but Hunter aimed
+a swinging blow at his head with all his force.
+
+Charley ducked with the quickness he had learned in a Y. M. C. A. gym
+and at the same instant drove his right fist forward with all of his
+weight behind it. It caught the sallow fisherman fair on his chin and
+sent him reeling backwards. He staggered and almost fell but recovering
+himself with an oath whipped out his sheath knife and came rushing at
+the plucky lad.
+
+It was a desperate situation. A lightning glance out of the corner of
+his eye showed Charley he could expect no help from his chums. They
+were menaced by the three ruffians with upraised knives. Their own
+knives lay in their fishing belts up in the cabin. No stick or club
+was within his reach. It was a case of bare hands against naked steel.
+Hunter came at him with a savage thrust. The lad leaped lightly to one
+side to avoid it. His foot slipped on a mossy rock and down he went on
+the sand.
+
+With a yell of triumph the fishermen leaped for him as he lay
+half-dazed by his fall.
+
+Crack, crack, crack came three sharp reports and the shrill whine of
+whistling bullets sang above the prostrate lad.
+
+The effect on the fishermen was startling.
+
+With a cry Hunter turned and ran for the launch and his companions
+crowding at his heels.
+
+"We'll get you yet," he yelled as he hurriedly cast off. "We'll get you
+when you ain't got that little nigger behind a tree guarding you with
+a gun. We"--but his curses were lost in the crackle of the engine as
+he threw on the switch.
+
+Walter and the captain hurried to Charley and helped him up from the
+sand.
+
+"I am all right," he declared as soon as he was on his feet. "I came
+down so hard it knocked the wind out of me for a moment but I am all
+right now."
+
+"Chris shot just in time," Walter exclaimed. "I thought you were going
+to be killed before our eyes."
+
+"I don't believe they would have gone that far," said his chum. "Hunter
+might have beat me up a bit but I think he aimed to frighten us off the
+island more than anything else."
+
+"I wonder why he is so anxious to drive us away from here," pondered
+Walter, puzzledly.
+
+"That's easy to tell," Charles declared. "His gang are smuggling
+aguardiente here from Cuba. That was the meaning of that schooner, the
+motor boat, and those signals last night. I found a cache of the stuff
+in that cleared place this morning. There must be five hundred bottles
+of it."
+
+"Then all we have to do is to tell the sheriff and he'll put the gang
+where they will not bother us any more," Walter exclaimed in relief.
+
+"That's what I tried to bluff Hunter into thinking," replied his chum,
+"but it did not work. You see, we have got no proofs and he knows it.
+We see a schooner at night acting queerly, also a motor boat, and
+we find a stock of aguardiente buried on the island, but that proves
+nothing against the Hunter gang or anyone else for that matter. Of
+course, I feel sure that they are the guilty ones but that isn't proof."
+
+"I reckon we are in something of a mess," said Captain Westfield,
+worriedly. "We are going to have trouble with those fellows sure. They
+can't carry on such a game with us here on the island, and it ain't
+likely they are going to stay quiet and lose all that stuff they've got
+cached."
+
+"It looks bad," Charley admitted, gravely. "We must talk it over
+carefully and decide what is best to do. But where's Chris? It's funny
+he don't show himself. Something must be the matter."
+
+With a sudden alarm, Charley hastened up for the cabin, followed by his
+chums.
+
+As soon as he came in sight of the hut, he slackened his speed with a
+sigh of relief for the little negro was seated in the doorway with the
+rifle in his hands.
+
+"Good work, Chris," he exclaimed. "Your shots came just in the nick of
+time. I am glad you didn't hit any of them though."
+
+"I ain't shot none, Massa Chas," protested the little negro. "You dun
+tole me to stay right hyar till you whistle an' you ain't whistled
+yet."
+
+"Then where did those shots come from?" Charley demanded.
+
+"Hit sounded like dey come from where you-alls was," Chris declared.
+
+"Then they must have come from the fringe of palms close to the beach,"
+Charley decided. "Well, some one on the island has done us a good turn
+and we better look him up and thank him. Likely he didn't want to be
+seen and recognized by Hunter."
+
+But at the end of an hour they were back at the cabin, a thoroughly
+mystified little group. They had been all over their little domain but
+no sign of a human being had they discovered.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+MORE TROUBLE.
+
+
+ALL the little party were greatly puzzled but Chris was the one most
+troubled. The superstitious little negro was quick to attach an uncanny
+meaning to the strange incident.
+
+"Hit was a ghost," he declared, solemnly. "Dat's jes' de way de ghosts
+do on Cat Island. Nobody can ebber find 'em when dey look for 'em. Dey
+jes' melt into de air."
+
+"Bosh, Chris," derided Charley, "there are no such things as ghosts."
+
+"Yes dar is, Massa Chas," persisted the little darkey. "Plenty of
+people has seed dem a heap ob times. My ole daddy on Cat Island dun
+seen one once. He come 'cross hit on de road one moonlight night. Hit
+was all white an' bigger den any man an' dar was blue fire comin' out
+ob hits eyes, an' nose, an' mouth. Daddy run like de wind an' he dun
+got away from hit. But he always 'lowed if he hadn't had his conjurer
+charm tied 'round his neck hit would hab cotched him sho'. Sho' dar is
+ghosts."
+
+Walter laughed. "Well, if there are bad spirits there must be good
+spirits also, Chris," he observed, "and this one seems to be a pretty
+good sort. He certainly done us a good turn. If I ever meet him, I hope
+he will not do the vanishing act for I want to thank him."
+
+But Chris was not to be reassured and he went about his task of getting
+dinner muttering darkly to himself.
+
+"Frankly, what do you make of it?" Walter inquired of his chum as they
+waited the preparation of the meal.
+
+"I? I don't know what to think of it yet," Charley confessed. "As soon
+as I found out that it was not Chris who did the shooting I thought
+maybe one of the Roberts boys had landed on the other side of the
+island and happened to come across just in the nick of time. I can
+understand that no one would want to be seen by the Hunter gang for the
+sake of avoiding future trouble with them, but I can not for the life
+of me understand why the unknown should wish to avoid us, also. That is
+the puzzling part. Why did he vanish, and where did he go to? He had no
+time to get away in a boat without our seeing him. It's a mystery to
+me."
+
+"I ain't worrying much about that," observed Captain Westfield.
+"Whoever it was he was friendly to us and that's more than we can say
+for that Hunter gang. We are bound to have more trouble with them, I
+fear, and I don't see any way to steer clear of it unless we pick up
+and leave this part of the country."
+
+"We can't do that," Walter declared. "We are penniless and there is no
+other work we can do around here. Besides we owe a good big bill at the
+store and it would not be right to go away and leave it for Mr. Daniels
+to pay."
+
+"No," agreed the captain, "we can't do that. Well, I don't know what is
+best to do. What's your opinion, Charley?"
+
+"Of course, we can't leave here," replied the lad, decidedly, "and I
+for one, don't want to leave. There are four of the Hunter gang and
+there are four of us. It's true, we have only one gun amongst us while
+they are probably well armed. In a way, I do not think the question of
+weapons is so very important. I do not believe that they will provoke
+a serious open fight. That demonstration this morning was to frighten
+us away. There is law in this state and officers capable of enforcing
+it, and, bad as that Hunter gang is reputed to be, I do not believe
+the members of it are going to run the risk of being hung for any open
+killing. What evil they will try to do to us will be done secretly and
+in such a way that we can not have them arrested for it. I judge, that
+is the way they have always done their meanness from what Bill Roberts
+said to Hunter that day. If we stay here that is what we will have to
+always be on our guard against. Of course such a state of things will
+not be pleasant but I believe we are as bright as they and by being
+watchful we will give them little chance to do us any injury."
+
+"What about that stuff they've got cached," objected Captain Westfield.
+"It's worth too much money for them to let it lay where it is and they
+won't dare take it away as long as we are on the island."
+
+"I've been thinking of that," Charley answered, "and I believe, the
+best thing to be done is to get the stuff off the island. If we catch
+any fish to-night, we will have to take them over to Clearwater and
+just tell Mr. Daniels about our finding the stuff. Likely, he will
+see that it is removed at once. That will rid the Hunter gang of the
+necessity of driving us off the island and it will likely scare them so
+that it will be some time before they attempt to smuggle any more in."
+
+"Wall, I reckon, that is the best course for us to steer," agreed the
+old sailor. "Of course, they'll have a grudge against us for the loss
+of the stuff but they've got one against us anyway, so it don't make
+much difference. We'll have to leave some one in camp all the time so
+as to protect our grub and things."
+
+"We will leave Chris," Charley decided. "One of us will have to cook
+and keep the nets mended up anyway and Chris is certainly the boy for
+the cooking job. We will leave the rifle with him. At night, or when
+there is any sign of trouble, he can bar himself up in the cabin and be
+safer than he would be with us. It's strong as a fort, and the palmetto
+logs it is built of will not catch fire easy if any one should try to
+smoke him out."
+
+Accordingly when dinner was finished, Charley explained the situation
+to the little negro, only telling him of the cached liquor and not
+mentioning the objections made to his presence amongst them so as
+to spare the little fellow's sensitive feelings. Chris protested
+vigorously at the plan to leave him behind.
+
+"I ain't scared ob dat poor white trash," he declared, "but hit ain't
+noways nice to stay hyar alone wid a haunt walking 'round on dis
+island. I jes' naturally can't do dat, Massa Chas."
+
+In vain his three companions argued with him. All the superstitions
+of his race were aroused. "A spirit was a haunting de island," he
+declared, "an' hit warn't noways wise to stay alone whar a haunt was.
+
+"If I only had my ole daddy's conjurin' charm, hit might be all right,"
+he said, doubtfully. "Hit dun saved him from a ghost once."
+
+"I'll tell you what I'll do," said Charley at last. "I'll let you have
+my one ghost charm. It will ward off any ghost that ever walked this
+island."
+
+"Has you got one for sho', Massa Chas? Let's see hit," exclaimed the
+relieved little darkey.
+
+Charley gravely produced from his pocket a tiny stone, Chinese
+mannikin, which he had once used as a watch charm and which had found
+its way into his pockets along with a few other worthless odds and
+ends. It was grotesquely carved and hideously ugly but Chris viewed it
+with delight.
+
+"Hit sho' looks like a powerful charm," he declared with the longing
+for possession.
+
+"I'll guarantee it to protect against any ghost I ever saw," declared
+Charley, truthfully and solemnly.
+
+"If you could dun spare hit to me, I reckon I wouldn't mind being left
+behind, Massa Chas," offered the little negro.
+
+"All right," Charley agreed, delighted with the success of his ruse.
+"You want to be careful not to lose it though. I don't know where I
+could get another like it."
+
+They left the appeased little darkey engaged in fastening the ugly
+mannikin with a string around his neck, and took their way down to the
+dock for the practice drill Charley had decided upon.
+
+"Now, I don't want to be bossy," the lad explained as they made their
+preparations for the trial, "but, as things are, I happen to be the
+only one of us who has had any experience in fishing. I would much
+rather that some one else could take the lead for fishing is one
+business where the leader must be obeyed without argument or question.
+His followers must give him the same quiet service that a military
+company gives its officers. It is upon such unquestionable following
+that the successes in fishing largely depends. The leader's position,
+running head boat it is called, requires quick judgment and swift
+action, and these can not be had if argument or explanations have to
+precede them."
+
+"That's all right, I understand what you mean," said Captain Westfield,
+placidly. "All you will have to do is to give your orders."
+
+"Sure," agreed Walter, "we wouldn't know what to do unless you did."
+
+"All right," agreed Charley. "I want to say, though, before we start,
+that this fishing is a nerve-trying business, as you will soon find
+out. Sometimes it wears a person's temper to a wire edge and he will
+say things and do things he afterwards regrets. If I should happen to
+speak shortly or curtly any time please overlook it if you can and I
+will do the same with you. I've seen this fishing game break up old
+friendships more than once. And now," he concluded, "for our practice.
+We will suppose now that we are stealing up on a school of fish. Our
+positions are this. My skiff goes ahead. The captain in his skiff keeps
+ten feet behind me and a trifle to the left. You, Walter, keep nearly
+opposite me but about four hundred feet distant. Now, when I give the
+signal to make a run, I will stop rowing. The captain will back the end
+of his skiff up to mine and I will tie our two nets together. Then I
+will shout to you and you will throw the end of your net overboard and
+we will all start rowing as hard as we can. You will watch my boat,
+Walter, and keep just opposite me all the time. When our nets are
+pretty well run out, I will shout again and we will both head directly
+for each other. When we come together, I go around your stern and cross
+your net with mine. As soon as you and I start, the captain starts
+also. He swings away from me and heads for where you dropped the end of
+your net. He crosses it, and, if he has any net left in his boat, he
+rows back inside the circle and zigzags back and forth until it is all
+run out. If we do this all right and luck holds good, we will have our
+fish penned up like this." With a stick he drew on the sand this simple
+diagram.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+"As soon as our nets run out," he continued, "we row around inside the
+circle and beat on our skiffs with the oars and make all the racket we
+can to drive the fish into the nets. Then, each man rows back to the
+end of his net and takes it up being careful to pile it right so that
+it will run out smoothly and also be careful not to break meshes taking
+out fish. I guess that's about all."
+
+"Why, that's simple as can be," Walter exclaimed.
+
+Charley grinned. "Let's try it and see," he said knowingly.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+ONE NIGHT'S SPORT.
+
+
+"NOW just imagine that we are really hunting fish," Charley directed,
+as he shoved his skiff from shore. "Take up your positions exactly as I
+directed and make as little noise as possible with your oars."
+
+His companions eagerly obeyed and the three skiffs slowly crept ahead
+as if stealing up on a school of fish.
+
+But their leader was not yet ready for real fishing and they had
+proceeded thus but a little ways when he gave the captain the signal
+for a run. The old sailor deftly backed up his skiff and threw Charley
+the end of his net. The lad caught it and quickly made it fast to his
+own. "Give way," he shouted, seizing his oars, and the three boats
+darted away while the nets ran out smoothly over their sterns.
+
+When he judged that three-fourths of his net was out, Charley shouted
+to his chums and the two boats swung around for each other. The last
+of Walter's net ran out just as Charley passed around the stern of
+his skiff and turning back into the circle rowed out the few remaining
+yards of his own net.
+
+"That's one important thing to remember," he commented as he rowed
+up to his chum's boat. "We always want to turn when we have got just
+enough net left to reach each other with. If our nets don't come
+together the fish all run out through the gap."
+
+"Whew," Walter panted, "I never dreamed those nets were so long. I
+thought my arms were going to break from rowing so hard before you gave
+the signal to turn."
+
+Charley grinned. "They are four hundred yards each--nearly a quarter of
+a mile long. Wait until you get one full of fish and it will seem forty
+miles long. The captain's got that other end closed up nicely, and now
+for the drumming up."
+
+The three rowed around inside the circle while Charley showed them how
+to frighten the fish into the nets by pounding on the bottoms of the
+skiffs and beating the water with the blades of their oars.
+
+"Why, the circle is full of fish," Walter suddenly exclaimed. "I can
+see hundreds of them darting about."
+
+"I saw them before I gave the signal to run," Charlie said coolly, but
+his words were lost in the din the captain and his chum were making
+in their excitement. Walter was beating the water frantically with
+his oar while the old sailor standing up in his skiff was clapping his
+hands and shouting "Shoo, shoo", much as though he was driving a flock
+of chickens.
+
+Charley rested on his oars and watched them with a broad grin on his
+face.
+
+"Don't get excited," he remarked, when at last they stopped from sheer
+exhaustion. "Captain, it's no use straining your voice yelling at
+the fish. They can't hear you. The only thing that scares them is a
+vibration of the water they live in. That beating the water with your
+oar is the proper caper, Walter, only it happens that these fish are
+mullet and you can't drive mullet into a gill net in the day time. Fine
+as the twine is, they see the meshes and back off. And, now, let's row
+back to the ends of our nets and pick them up."
+
+His two crestfallen companions meekly obeyed, and after considerable
+blundering due to their inexperience the nets were once more got aboard
+the skiffs.
+
+The two novices' arms and backs were beginning to ache but Charley
+insisted on another trial.
+
+It was well he did so for Walter had not rowed out a third of his net
+when some leads caught in the webbing and the pile turned over into a
+tangled heap that took the three a good half hour to straighten out.
+
+"You must be careful how you pile your net in the boat," Charley
+cautioned, when the mess was at last straightened out. "If that had
+happened when we were really and truly fishing it might have meant
+the loss of forty or fifty dollars' worth of fish. You must keep your
+loose webbing piled clear of your lead and cork lines. I noticed you
+had piled your net carelessly, that's why I wanted to make another run.
+There's nothing like experience to make one careful."
+
+"You might have told me about it and saved all this hard extra work,"
+grumbled Walter with a flash of temper. "My arms and back ache like a
+tooth ache."
+
+"Cheer up. We'll go ashore now, and have a rest and supper before we
+start out for real work," said Charley, cheerfully, ignoring his chum's
+remarks.
+
+A long rest under the palm trees and one of Chris' capital suppers put
+Walter into good humor again. "I guess, I got mad a little too easily,"
+he half apologized to his chum over the meal. "I didn't stop to think
+that you had been working as hard as I and that you would not have put
+us all to that extra work if you had not thought it necessary."
+
+"That's all right," answered Charley, heartily. "Just forget it. Every
+one gets a little riled sometimes, and fishing is mighty hard on the
+temper." But the lad knew that the flashes of temper would come many
+times before his chum became a seasoned fisherman. "Oh, well," he
+consoled himself, grimly, "it's no use trying to avoid them, the sooner
+they come and go, why, the better."
+
+Chris had prepared a lunch for the fishermen to carry with them to eat
+during the night, and just as the sun went down, the three boarded the
+launch and with the three skiffs in tow set out for their first attempt
+in their new calling.
+
+The memory of that first night will linger in Walter's and the
+Captain's memory for years to come. They had run about two miles in the
+launch when Charley shut off the engine.
+
+"I think we had better anchor here and take to the skiffs," he said.
+"These are strange waters and we might pile the launch up on a rock in
+the darkness."
+
+A lantern was lit and placed on the launch's bow to guide them back to
+her, and the other lanterns were also lit, turned down low and placed
+in the bottom of the skiffs.
+
+"None of you must ever allow your lights to show while we are hunting
+fish," Charley continued. "A light frightens them worse than anything
+else. A flash of lightning makes them all scurry for deep water.
+There's no use taking to the skiffs for a little while, it isn't dark
+enough to fish yet."
+
+"That's one thing which puzzles me," Walter said. "How are you going to
+find fish at night. Of course, I understand how you can tell where they
+are in the day time, for if you can't see the fish themselves, you can
+tell they are there by the ripples they make in the water."
+
+"They are oftentimes easier to find at night," Charley affirmed. "There
+is nearly always more or less phosphorescence in the water and a fish
+can not move without leaving a glowing streak in his wake, that is, if
+he is within ten feet of the surface. An expert fisherman can tell by
+the character of the bright streak the kind of fish that makes it. Each
+species makes a different kind of movement and an expert can read their
+trails like a hunter reads tracks. Nights when the water does not fire
+it is harder, for then the fisherman has to go by sound. Each kind of
+fish makes its own peculiar noise but it is hard to distinguish some of
+them apart and still harder to tell their size. Our nets are made for
+mullet and that is the only kind of fish we need be concerned with."
+
+"Why, there is a lot more to fishing than I thought," Walter commented.
+"I supposed it was simple and easy to learn."
+
+"It takes years of experience to make a skilful fisherman," Charley
+assured him. "I do not claim to be one. I only just know the rudiments
+of it."
+
+"I reckon it's that way with most everything," Captain Westfield
+remarked, thoughtfully, "from running a ship up to running a nation.
+Thar's always a heap more to larn than the man outside thinks thar is."
+
+"But all the knowledge a man can get does not help without plenty of
+good hard work," Charley amended. "And it's time for us to begin ours
+now. It's dark enough now, I believe. All aboard for our first attempt."
+
+The three scrambled into their skiffs and casting loose from the
+launch, took to their oars bringing their crafts into the formation
+they had practiced.
+
+In a few minutes, the launch was lost to sight and they could not see
+each other. Only the faint glow of the turned-down lanterns rising
+above the gunwales of their skiffs enabled them to keep track of each
+other.
+
+As they crept slowly on into the night, Walter was surprised to see how
+teeming the waters were with life. On every side of his boat, fiery
+streaks marked the passage of finny creatures. At times, he passed
+through spaces fairly aglow with the movements of them. As Charley
+had said, there was a marked difference in the character of the water
+trails. Some were close to the surface, while others showed deep below.
+Some were long and continuous in a straight line. Others twisted and
+turned, while still others seemed to run only a little ways and then
+stopped suddenly. But they all marked the passage of fish, and he soon
+began to wonder why Charley did not give the signal to circle them. At
+first, he consoled himself with the thought that his chum knew what
+he was doing, but as they rowed steadily on mile after mile through
+the flashing schools, he began to have doubts. After all, Charley had
+admitted that he was not an experienced fisherman. Perhaps Charley
+was not passing through the same schools. Perhaps he was not watching
+close. Walter's arms and back began to ache from the steady rowing and
+as his fatigue increased he began to get irritated. Why all this steady
+rowing on and on when there were plenty of fish all about them. The
+same thoughts were passing through Captain Westfield's mind but he had
+been bred in a calling which demands constant patient obedience to the
+one in command. He had elected to follow Charley's leadership and that
+was the end of it. He would do it without question.
+
+At last Walter could stand it no longer.
+
+"Say, Charley," he hailed, "there's lots of fish around here."
+
+"I see them," came the cheerful answer. "They don't look right to me,
+though. Let's go on a bit."
+
+Sullenly, Walter rowed on in silence. After what to his tired muscles
+seemed ages of weary pulling, a crisp order came floating over the
+water.
+
+"Get ready--Drop your net weight over"--A pause, then: "All right--all
+together--pull hard."
+
+Walter forgot his aching limbs in the excitement of the moment. He bent
+to his oars and sent his skiff flying through the water while his net
+rippled swiftly out over the stern.
+
+"Come together," at last came the order and he swung his flying craft
+around to meet his chum's.
+
+"Gee," panted Charley, as he crossed the end of Walter's net, just as
+the last of his own ran out. "I pulled myself out of breath trying to
+get around that school. Most of them outran me, but I guess we have got
+a few penned up in the circle. Put up your lantern and let's rest a bit
+before we drum up. Good," he exclaimed as the lights flashed out over
+the water. "They are hitting the nets already---Listen."
+
+From all sides of them came a soft peculiar smacking sound much like
+that made by a person opening and closing his mouth rapidly.
+
+"Listen, old chap," Charley cried in glee, "you are hearing your first
+catch of mullet."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+THE QUARREL.
+
+
+THE new fishermen could hardly wait to beat up the circle so eager were
+they to see what their nets contained.
+
+"I guess we have got all there was in the circle," Charley at last
+announced. "Let's start to take up. Fasten your lantern to the end of
+an oar and fix it so it will shine down on your net so that you can see
+what you are doing, look out for cat fish. I put a short club in each
+of the skiffs to-day. If you get a cat fish, kill it before you try to
+take it out of your net."
+
+"What kind of looking fish are they?" Walter paused to inquire.
+
+"They are a slimy fish without scales," Charley explained. "They
+have a flat head and on each side of the gills and on the back are
+needle-sharp horns about three inches long with fine saw teeth along
+the edge. When the fish are swimming the horns lay back flat against
+the body, but when they strike a net or anything else, they stick the
+horns straight out. They are fierce to take out of a net, they will
+tangle up dozens of meshes on those horns and the fine twine is hard
+to work off the saw edges. It's dangerous to handle them unless they
+are killed for they are liable to flop and stick those horns in you
+and make a very poisonous wound. Well, let's get to work, the night is
+slipping away fast."
+
+With lanterns popped out over the skiff's stern the three set to work.
+
+At first it was exciting to haul in the nets with the struggling
+fish entangled in their meshes, and to watch the pile in their boats
+steadily grow, but the novelty soon wore off and only the hard work
+remained. And hard work it was, harder than either the captain or
+Walter had dreamed. A breeze had arisen since sunset and they had to
+drag their skiffs up against it as they pulled in their nets. When they
+came to a fish they had to hold the net with their feet, while they
+bent over under the dim light and freed it from the entangling meshes.
+Every now and then they came to a great mass of sea moss caught up in
+their nets, which required all their strength to dump out, nor did they
+escape painful accidents, although they met with none of the dreaded
+cat fish, every fish handled by them seemed armed with sharp fins and
+their fingers were soon sore with a multitude of tiny punctures. A
+flopping fish flipped a bit of jelly into the captain's eye. It burned
+like a touch from a red hot iron, and the old sailor half blinded grew
+faint from the intense pain. At last Walter realized what it meant to
+handle four hundred yards of net. Before he had got half of his in
+the boat he was fairly ready to lie down and cry from pain and sheer
+weariness.
+
+Charley, more expert, soon had his net boated and taking hold of the
+other end of Walter's helped him with the balance, then rowed over and
+performed a like service for the captain. "Let's rest a little bit and
+eat our lunch before we start again," he suggested when the nets were
+all up. "I'll anchor my boat and you both come alongside and tie up to
+me so we can all eat together."
+
+He had brought a box partly filled with sand along in his skiff and in
+it he now proceeded to build a small fire on which he boiled coffee and
+heated up the lunch Chris had given them. The hot meal and steaming
+coffee made his two companions almost forget for a time their pains and
+weariness.
+
+"How many do you think we got that time?" Walter inquired, over a
+second cup of coffee.
+
+"About twelve hundred pounds of mullet," he judged, "some thirty odd
+pounds of trout and about two hundred pounds of bottom fish," say
+twenty-eight dollars' worth altogether. "That's pretty fair for one
+run. If we can get in four more runs like it before daylight, it will
+make a good night's work."
+
+"Four more runs," cried Walter in dismay, all his aches and pains
+returning at the thought, "why I don't believe I can last out one more."
+
+"I know it's tough on you two," said Charley sympathetically, "but we
+have got to do it. We cannot hope to make money by just making one or
+two runs a night. It will not be quite so bad after you get hardened to
+it. I know just how you feel. I once fished every night steady for six
+months and we made from six to eight runs each night. I was new to the
+business then and I thought the first two or three nights that it would
+certainly kill me. Tired. Why many a time I've gone sound asleep while
+rowing and fallen over into the bottom of the boat amongst the fish
+without waking up. Oh, it's tough all right, but you have got to get
+used to it."
+
+Walter was silent. He was doing a sum in mental arithmetic, "eight
+runs a night. Four hundred yards of net to run out each time and four
+hundred yards of net to take in. Eight hundred yards multiplied eight
+times was six thousand four hundred yards or over three miles besides
+all the endless rowing." Why it was more than flesh and blood could
+stand. Was any amount of money worth such nerve and muscle racking
+labor? He was still pondering this when his chum gave the order to
+start again and they once more fell into the old formation and rowed
+silently on into the darkness.
+
+Mile after mile they rowed steadily on until the launch's lanterns
+showed only a pin point of light in the distance. The ache in Walter's
+muscles grew to an acute pain. Every stroke of the oars was an effort
+that seemed impossible to repeat. All around his boat came and went
+darting flashes of many fish. Again the old question arose. Why all
+this aimless, senseless rowing. He felt a hot unreasoning resentment
+against his chum that grew with his deadly weariness and at last flowed
+out in speech.
+
+"Charley," he snapped out across the water, "I'm getting sick of this
+nonsense. There's fish all around us. Let's either try to catch them or
+go home. I'm tired of this rowing, rowing, rowing for nothing."
+
+Charley was silent a moment before replying. Matters had come to the
+pass he had feared. He had witnessed the same thing many times with new
+beginners. One of two things must happen, either Walter must learn to
+have faith in his leadership until he himself had gained experience or
+else they must give up fishing. No amount of argument would convince
+him like a bit of experience, as the result of having his own way in
+something he knew nothing about. It was bitter medicine but it was the
+only treatment which would check the disease, however, he decided to
+give his chum one last chance.
+
+"I am doing the best I know how, Walt," he answered. "I have to follow
+my best judgment in this fishing so long as I am running head boat."
+
+"Judgment nothing," scoffed Walter angrily, "there's no judgment in
+rowing our arms off when there are fish all around us."
+
+"All right Old Chap, you can run head boat if you think you can do
+better. I'll follow you without question," Charley replied wearily.
+
+"All right, I will," agreed Walter, shortly. "I can promise you I will
+not make you row yourself to death for nothing."
+
+In silence Charley changed positions with his chum. They had not
+proceeded a hundred yards in the new order when Walter's skiff slid in
+amongst the biggest school he had yet seen.
+
+"All right, let's run them," he shouted excitedly.
+
+Charley smiled grimly as he cast him the end of his net to make fast
+but he said nothing, and when his chum gave the signal to start he was
+off at the word.
+
+"Whew," panted Walter, as they came together at the end of the run,
+"we've made a killing this time. Just look at the bright streaks. Why,
+the circle is full of fish. Come on, let's drum them up."
+
+"I wouldn't drum any," Charley advised.
+
+"I'm running head boat now," Walter reminded him shortly, "kindly do as
+I say."
+
+"All right," his chum agreed, cheerfully, and fell to beating the water
+lustily with his oar.
+
+"I guess they are all in the nets now," Walter at last announced.
+"Let's pick them up."
+
+Charley rowed back to the end of his net in silence. He grinned with
+grim humor as his quick ear caught queer grunting sounds from along
+the lines of net. He seized the end of his and pulled it aboard, then
+he paused, adjusted his lantern carefully, took a drink of water from
+his jug, laid his short club handy on the seat beside him, and settled
+himself for a long spell of hard work.
+
+Walter reached for the end of his net, tingling with anticipation. The
+first few yards came in empty, then a score of white bellies showed in
+the dripping webbing as he hoisted it into the boat. Pride gave way to
+dismay. Instead of the clean, glistening mullet he had expected, these
+were slimy, flat-headed fish, loathsome to look at, emitting repulsive
+grunts and reeking forth a sickening odor. Each was hopelessly tangled
+in a mess of webbing. For a moment, he wildly debated the notion of
+casting the net back overboard and fleeing. Then he grimly, doggedly,
+settled down to work. His thoughts were more unpleasant than the
+task before him. He had brought this upon himself and not only upon
+himself but upon his companions also. Because he had become a little
+tired, he had given way to a fit of temper and made a fool of himself.
+Well, Charley and the captain would never want him to fish with them
+again, and it served him right, but his heart ached at the thought of
+separating from those kind, true, friendly companions after all the
+years they had spent together. He paused for a moment and listened.
+From the captain's skiff came muttered exclamations as the old sailor
+labored over his unwelcome catch. From Charley's boat came only the
+sharp, frequent crack of the club as he hauled the detested fish in
+over the stern.
+
+Slowly the minutes lengthened into hours and the night dragged away,
+while the humbled lad, suffering in every muscle, his fingers bleeding
+from a score of scratches, and one hand swelling rapidly where a horn
+had entered, worked grimly on. Slowly Charley's light drew away from
+him for the other lad's experience had taught him the knack of taking
+out fish swiftly.
+
+Once, Walter raised his eyes from his task and looked about. The
+morning star had risen in the east and Charley's light had disappeared.
+"Got disgusted and gone home," he decided, bitterly. "Well, I don't
+blame him."
+
+The day was just breaking when Walter, at last, reached the end of his
+net. The captain had escaped lightly and had been through for some
+time. He was stretched out on a seat, resting, and placidly smoking his
+pipe. The launch was only a short distance away. Charley had rowed back
+and was bringing her up to save his chums the long row to her.
+
+"Good morning," Charley hailed, cheerfully, as he shut off the engine,
+"all through."
+
+Walter almost shouted with joy. His chum was not angry with him after
+all.
+
+Charley ranged alongside and peeped into his skiff.
+
+"What have you saved them all for," he exclaimed, as his eye lighted on
+the big pile of fish.
+
+"Why, to sell," Walter faltered.
+
+His chum grinned. "No one buys them. Why you couldn't give them away.
+But come, both of you and make fast. We'll just get home in time for
+breakfast."
+
+It was a humble and abashed lad that stepped aboard the launch.
+
+"Charley, I've been a fool," he blurted out, "but if you can overlook
+it this time, it will not happen again."
+
+"Forget it," said his chum heartily. "I hated it more for your sake
+than for my own, but it's all over now. Cheer up, Old Chap."
+
+"How did you know what kind of fish they were?" Walter inquired, after
+a brief silence.
+
+"By the streaks. A catfish fires deep below the surface and he only
+runs a little ways then stops. A mullet makes a long straight streak
+close the surface. But those were not all catfish we rowed through
+to-night. There were sharks in one place, a school of porgies in
+another, and a lot of sea bass and some fish I could not determine and
+was afraid to run."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+THE GHOST.
+
+
+"I WANT you two to lie down in the cabin and catch an hour's nap on the
+way home," Charley said as soon as he got the engine started. "I'll run
+the launch in."
+
+Walter and the captain protested feebly, but the lad would hear no
+refusal. "You both look utterly played out," he declared. "There is no
+use of all of us staying awake, and I am fresher than either of you.
+Fishing is not so hard for me because I know all the little tricks of
+handling a net and taking out fish that helps to make it easier. You
+will soon learn them and get hardened to the work, and then we will
+take turns running the launch. Now stretch out, that hour's rest will
+do you a world of good."
+
+His two chums lost no time in arguing the point, but stretched on the
+cabin floor and pillowing their heads on their arms were instantly
+asleep. So worn out were they that Charley could hardly wake them when
+the dock was reached.
+
+Chris had a hot breakfast and steaming coffee waiting for them; as
+soon as it was dispatched Charley ordered the two off to bed. "Get
+rested up good for to-night's work," he announced. "There is nothing
+that you need do now. Chris will pull the nets out to dry and I'll row
+across to Clearwater with the fish. There is no need of more than one
+going and I want to see the sheriff and have a talk with him."
+
+It was only a few minutes' run across the bay to the little town, and
+Charley was soon tying up to the fish dock. He hurried up to the fish
+house and notified Mr. Daniels of his catch and waited while a wagon
+brought the fish up and they were weighed. The catch totaled thirty
+dollars in cash.
+
+"Not bad for the first night," said Mr. Daniels, encouragingly.
+"Several of my old experienced fishermen caught less than that last
+night."
+
+Leaving the fish house the lad hurried over to the store and ordered
+some supplies he needed sent down to the launch. By the time his
+purchases were made he judged it was late enough to find the sheriff in
+his office and there he accordingly made his way.
+
+But here he met with much disappointment, for he was informed that
+Sheriff Brown was out of town and would not return for several days.
+
+He headed back to his launch greatly troubled in his mind. He had
+counted strongly on the sheriff taking charge of the cached liquor.
+As long as it remained on the island, just so long could they expect
+trouble from its owners. Now he could not decide what was best to do.
+He was hurrying on debating the question with himself when turning a
+corner, engrossed in his own thoughts, he almost collided with Bill
+Roberts hurrying in the opposite direction.
+
+"Starboard your helm a bit and take in some of that press of sail
+you're carrying," hailed that worthy, "you came mighty near running me
+down. How's everything? How's fishing coming on?"
+
+Charley warmed to the sight of Bill's friendly, frank, good-humored
+face.
+
+"The fishing's all right," he answered, brightly, "but some other
+things are worrying me. I was thinking of them and not noticing where I
+was going."
+
+"You look tired and worried," said Bill with a critical scrutiny. "Can
+we Roberts help you out any with what's worrying you?"
+
+"You might help me out with some advice," said the lad with a sudden
+impulse. "If you can spare me a few minutes' time I'll tell you what's
+the matter.
+
+"Got all the time in the world," said Bill cheerfully. "We are not
+fishing for a few days. Our nets are about all worn out and we are
+waiting for new ones from the factory. There is a seat over there under
+the tree, come on and sit down a while and tell me all about it. It
+helps a man sometimes just to tell his troubles."
+
+He listened with eager interest while Charlie told the story of the
+strange schooner, the motor boat and the buried liquor and of their
+quarrel with Hunter's gang.
+
+He pondered a while after the lad had concluded. "Kind of a bad mess,"
+he said at last. "Of course it's the Hunter gang that's doing the
+smuggling, but you haven't got anything to prove it. They ain't going
+to lose all that liquor they've got buried either, but they ain't going
+to dig it up as long as there is a chance of their being seen doing it,
+consequently their only hope is to get you fellows off the island by
+fair means or foul."
+
+"Just the conclusion I arrived at," agreed Charley, grimly.
+
+"Your plan to have the sheriff take charge of it was the thing, but
+of course that cannot be done until he comes back. It isn't likely
+they will seek an open fight with you, they are too foxy for that. But
+they will try to get at you by every underhanded means they can think
+of. You'll have to be on your guard every minute until the sheriff
+returns and takes charge of that liquor. Those fellows are cunning and
+treacherous. I am not going to tell you of the things they have done
+to other fellows who have crossed them. It would do no good and only
+worry you more. I just want to impress upon you that you cannot watch
+out too sharp. Now I am going to lend you another rifle to keep in the
+launch; we have plenty of guns, for we hunt and trap when the fishing
+is poor. As I have said we are not fishing for a few days, and if you
+should need help any time just fire three shots close together and we
+will be over in a hurry. We would be tickled to death to catch those
+fellows in some devilment so that they could be sent up for a good
+string of years."
+
+"You are very good," said Charley, gratefully. "It's not right to
+bother you with our troubles, but it has been a great relief just to
+unburden myself to you."
+
+"Sorry I cannot be of more help to you," Bill replied, heartily. "I
+hope we are going to be good friends, for I like the looks of your
+crowd. Our trouble with Hunter's gang has kept us from making friends
+amongst the other fishermen. They will not meet us half way for fear of
+the injuries the Hunter gang might do them, if they got friendly with
+us. You will find it the same way in your case, and it will be pleasant
+for us to visit back and forth on stormy days when we have nothing else
+to do. There is another thing I can do that will help you a bit. Come
+on down to the dock with me and I'll do it now."
+
+Near the end of the pier they came upon Hunter himself, holding forth
+to a gang of his cronies. The fellows made to move away at their
+approach but Roberts hailed him.
+
+"Look here, Hunter," he said in his straightforward way, "I want to
+impress one thing on you so you will not forget it. This lad and his
+companions are friends of ours and anyone that does any of them harm,
+has not only them to reckon with but with the Roberts boys also,
+remember that!" Then turning his back to the scowling fisherman, he
+said good-by to Charley and walked away, indifferent to the lowering
+glances of Hunter's cronies.
+
+"Fine protector you've got," sneered Hunter, when Roberts was out of
+hearing. "Just mark one thing, young fellow, your gang are going to
+wish they had never seen Clearwater before we are through with them,
+and that goes for that upstart Roberts, too."
+
+"We are not afraid of you or your threats," Charley replied, coolly, as
+he cast off the launch and started up the engine.
+
+As the throbbing little engine drove the launch through the dancing,
+sparkling water, Charley lay back in the thwart with his hand on the
+wheel and rested his aching body. He was tired in muscle and brain. It
+was nearly noon and his eyes were heavy with sleep. He dozed off for a
+moment only to wake up with a jerk as something cold touched his foot.
+He glanced down and was startled to see that several inches of water
+was sloshing around his feet. Thoroughly awake, he straightened up
+and looked around. He was in the middle of the bay about a mile from
+either shore. He had evidently dozed but a few minutes, yet the launch
+had been dry when he dozed off and now there was several inches of
+water in her and it was rapidly increasing. She must have sprung a leak
+and a big one at that. Seizing the bailer with his free hand he began
+throwing the water out in a steady stream. Swiftly he calculated his
+chances of making the shore. The engine rested only a few inches above
+the bottom of the boat. If the water reached it the motor would stop.
+He had no fear for his own safety for he could easily swim across the
+bay if necessary. But if the launch filled she would sink, their career
+as fishermen would be at an end, and Mr. Daniels would be poorer the
+several hundred dollars the launch had cost.
+
+A few minutes' bailing convinced him that the water was rapidly
+gaining. It had risen to within a couple of inches of the engine. Five
+minutes more and it would reach the motor. It was a desperate situation
+and the keen-witted lad took a desperate chance. Letting go the wheel
+he frantically tore at the thin sheathing that lined the bottom. Luck
+was with him for the first piece came up easily revealing a large,
+smooth, round hole, just below the water line, through which the water
+was gushing in a steady stream. Tearing up his shirt, he rolled it up
+into a tapering plug and thrust it into the hole. Holding it in place
+with one hand, he steered for the dock with the other. The water still
+came in around the plug, but slowly; and with a sigh of relief, the lad
+at last ran the launch upon the beach beside the dock just as the water
+rippled up around the engine's base. As she grounded, the launch heeled
+over on the other side lifting the hole above the water, and Charley
+had a chance to examine it more closely. Its smooth, regular appearance
+and some chips adhering to the edge showed that it had been made by an
+augur, and a ball of waste floating around on the water showed that
+it had been plugged to stay closed until the pressure of swift moving
+through the water should force it out. There was no doubt in the lad's
+mind as to who had made it and he began to feel a certain respect for
+the resourcefulness of his enemies. It was a cunning scheme. If it had
+succeeded it would have accomplished its purpose. With no launch, he
+and his chums would have been forced to leave the island; for without
+one they could no longer have carried on their fishing.
+
+Charley whittled out a smooth plug of soft white pine and drove it
+firmly into the hole. He cut off the plug flush with the planking, and
+flattening out a piece of tin from a can, nailed it over the spot to
+hold the plug firmly in place.
+
+Chris brought dinner down to him and he snatched a few mouthfuls and
+drank two cups of coffee while he worked.
+
+By the time the job was finished and the launch bailed out, it was well
+along in the afternoon and the lad groaned as he realized that he must
+face another hard night's work without sleep.
+
+"Massa Chas," said Chris, as they trudged up to the shack together, "I
+ain't bothered you-alls 'bout it before 'cause I seed you was all tired
+an' wore out, but I'ze dun got something to tell you."
+
+Charley glanced sharply at the little negro's serious face.
+
+"What is it?" he said, quietly.
+
+"Massa Chas," said the little fellow, solemnly, "sho' as I is a living
+nigger, I seed dat ghost last night."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+CHRIS' STORY.
+
+
+THE little darkey's face was so serious that Charley could not doubt
+that he had seen, or imagined he had seen, something out of the
+common. He was so long familiar with Chris' superstitious fears that,
+ordinarily, he would have scoffed at them, but now, he remembered the
+shooting the previous day and the mystery surrounding the disappearance
+of the unseen marksman.
+
+"Tell me just what you saw, Chris," he said, quietly.
+
+"Hit was soon arter sundown," began the little negro. "I had dun got
+de dishes washed up an' was fixin' to go to bed when I 'lowed that a
+little swim in de gulf would make me sleep a sight better. So I starts
+down for de beach. I ain't more den thirty feet away when I seed hit
+atween me an' de water. Hit was walking back an' forth, back an' forth,
+wid hits face turned all de time to de water. Hit was white, all white,
+Massa Chas."
+
+"What did you do?" questioned Charley, as the little negro paused,
+shivering at the recollection.
+
+"I don't know 'zackly, but I reckon I let out a yell an' shut my eyes
+to hide out dat awful sight. Den I remembers dat charm an' I grabs
+for hit, saying some conjurer words daddy taught me. Dat sho's am a
+powerful charm, Massa Chas. Hit sho' am powerful."
+
+"Go on," said Charley, impatiently.
+
+"Dat charm sho' did de work, for when I opened my eyes dat ghost was
+gone. Jes' dun melted into de air. Soon as my laigs quit shakin' so
+dat I could walk I makes for de cabin an' bars up de door an' windows
+tight. Dat's all I guess 'sept dat hit was a powerful long time afore I
+could get to sleep an' I keeps awishin' for you-alls."
+
+"How long did you keep your eyes closed?" Charley questioned.
+
+"Hit seemed like a year but I reckon hit wasn't no more dan a minute."
+
+Charley arose, wearily. "Show me the spot where you saw it," he
+directed.
+
+The little negro lad led the way without hesitation. When about twenty
+feet from the water's edge, he stopped. "Hit was right hyar," he
+declared.
+
+Charley bent down and examined the sand carefully. A glance assured
+him that Chris' story had some basis in facts for numerous footprints
+were impressed upon the firm, white sand. He studied them with
+eager interest. They were not fishermen's tracks, or those of his
+companions, for the fishermen all wore big, heavy boots, and he and
+his chums were shod in rough, broad-toed, working shoes, while the
+tracks indicated a small shoe--possibly a number seven--and their shape
+suggested expensive footwear.
+
+"If I were a story book detective, Chris, I could tell from these
+tracks the age, size, and color of the one who wore them; his height,
+the color of his hair, and what he ate for breakfast; but, as I am
+only a common, every-day mortal, all I can make out of them is that
+your ghost was a man, and a pretty heavy one, too, judging from the
+way his feet sank into this hard sand; see, our shoes hardly make an
+impression. If his clothes matched his shoes, he must have been well
+dressed. I should say that he wasn't very old either for here is where
+he jumped at least five feet. That must have been when you worked your
+charm or rabbit's foot on him."
+
+"I say hit was a ghost," persisted Chris, stubbornly. "Hit was white,
+all white, an' hit vanished jes' like that."
+
+"And here's where it vanished," said Charley, following a line of the
+footprints to where they led up into the fringe of palms. "He might
+as well have vanished, though, for we cannot track him in this hard
+ground; so we may as well go back to the cabin. Hereafter, Chris, just
+as soon as it comes dark, go into the cabin and bar the door and
+nothing will hurt you. The charm will guard you from any stray ghosts
+and the bars and rifle will keep anything else out."
+
+"Dat's all right, Massa Chas," said the little negro, bravely. "I ain't
+scared much ob de ghost now, I'ze seed how dat charm works. An' golly!
+I reckon dat ghost is de only thing dis nigger ever was scared of."
+
+Vain as was this boast, Charley knew it was true. He had seen the
+plucky little negro in many dangers and had never known him to show a
+sign of fear except at the unknown which excited all the superstitious
+fears of his race.
+
+It still lacked an hour to time to go fishing and Charley lay down on
+his couch but he could not sleep. He lay quiet, puzzling over Chris'
+experience. Coupled with the mysterious shots of the day before, it
+made a problem that defied all his attempts at solution. "Who could the
+unseen one be? Certainly not one of the fishermen, the tracks proved
+that. Chris' oft-repeated declaration that the ghost was all in white
+suggested that it might be a tourist. Tourists often dressed in white
+duck or linen in the tropics, while thinner-blooded natives always wore
+warmer clothing at this season of the year. But what would any tourist
+want on the island, and above all, why remain hidden. After all, the
+mysterious one was friendly to them so why worry about the matter? But
+was he friendly? Might not those mysterious shots have been aimed at
+them as well as the fishermen?" And then a startling thought occurred
+to the lad. "Might not it be an escaped lunatic?" That would explain
+the queer actions for which he could find no other logical reason. The
+thought was most distasteful. A lunatic at large on the island, and
+armed with a deadly weapon was more to be feared than all the hostile
+fishermen. With an effort, Charley shook off his gloomy speculations
+and rising, proceeded to don his fishing clothes. He was dead tired and
+would gladly have staid in this night but he felt that he must not hold
+back. They must fish every night while the weather was fine and they
+could get out. There would be stormy nights when they could not get out
+and they must work their best to make up for their lack of experience.
+
+When he was fully dressed, he aroused his companions. They were still
+stiff and sore from the unaccustomed labor and their hands were swollen
+and painful from the many pricks they had received, but their long
+sleep had refreshed them and they attacked with ravenous appetites the
+hearty supper Chris had cooked.
+
+"I am going in the opposite direction to-night," Charley announced, as
+they took their places in the launch and started out. "I got a wireless
+message to-day telling me that there is a big bunch of fish to the
+north of us. It's a fact," he replied, in answer to his companion's
+questioning looks. "All day there has been a big flock of pelicans
+hovering over the water in that direction. They often follow up large
+bunches of fish to pick up the ones wounded by sharks."
+
+They had run but a little way when he gave the order to cast anchor. "I
+think we have gone far enough," he said. "It is easier to find a big
+school at night than in the day time and I do not wish to run by them
+in the launch. Somehow, I've got a hunch that we are going to strike
+a big bunch, from the space those pelicans were spread out over the
+water."
+
+His suppressed excitement communicated itself to his companions and
+they fidgeted about, impatient for dark to come.
+
+It came at last and they lost no time in getting away from the launch.
+
+For perhaps a mile they rowed on in silence, then Charley ceased rowing
+and thrust an oar down deep into the water. He viewed the result with
+dissatisfaction. "For some reason the water does not fire to-night,"
+he announced. "It happens that way very often. I am sorry for we'll
+have to fish by sound, and that is much more difficult. Now whenever I
+stop rowing both of you stop also. That will give me a better chance to
+listen."
+
+Resuming his oars, he continued his cautious advance, pausing every
+little while and straining his ears for the faintest sound from the
+water.
+
+At last, he stopped suddenly. His quick ear had caught the sound for
+which he had been waiting.
+
+"Listen!" he cried, excitedly.
+
+From far ahead came a faint rippling murmur frequently broken by soft
+pats upon the water.
+
+"That's the school," he declared, eagerly. "It's a big one and they are
+working this way. All we have to do is to hold our boats in position
+and wait. They are coming straight for us."
+
+"If those are mullet, they don't sound as though they amounted to
+much," said Captain Westfield, doubtfully. "I've heard mullet jump when
+they made a splash like you'd thrown an anchor overboard."
+
+"Mullet working that fashion, you never want to run," Charley
+explained. "Fishermen have a saying: 'Never fish jumping mullet.' When
+mullet are schooled up they do not jump high because of injuring others
+in their fall. That patting sound you hear is the flipping of their
+tails above water."
+
+Keyed up to the highest pitch our three fishermen waited the coming of
+the steadily advancing multitude.
+
+"Pass me the end of your net, Captain," Charley at last directed, in a
+voice that trembled with excitement.
+
+All ready with oars dipped he waited, waited until even in the darkness
+Walter could see the advancing school coming, bearing a tiny wave
+before them. Nearer crept the wave, fifty feet, thirty feet, twenty
+feet, then--"Go!" Charley shouted, and the boats, driven by the
+strength of excitement, leaped in amongst the frightened school. Around
+them the water boiled and foamed with the frightened fish. They struck
+the sides of the skiffs like hailstones on a tin roof. They battered
+against the dipped oars making them vibrate like an electric current.
+
+Charley held on his course as long as he dared before giving the signal
+to close up. When they came together, the end of his net barely crossed
+over Walter's.
+
+"I came near losing them all by being too greedy," he panted. "A few
+feet more and my net would not have reached you and they would have
+poured out of the gap like quicksilver. Well, I guess we've got enough
+for our breakfast, all right."
+
+"How many do you think we've got?" Walter questioned, eagerly.
+
+"Wait and see," Charley laughed. "Come on and let's get drummed up good
+and start picking up as quick as we can. I fancy we've got plenty of
+work ahead of us."
+
+The drumming finished, they rowed back to the ends of their nets.
+Walter leaned over and dragged his aboard, then gave a shout of
+delight. "They are sticking in it like pins in a pin cushion," he
+shouted.
+
+"Same here," agreed Charley, happily, "and I guess, the captain is in
+the same fix."
+
+In a few minutes their boats had drifted apart and put a bar to
+further conversation, but Walter grinned as there floated over the
+water Charley's voice singing all the songs he knew, and the captain's
+whistle going over and over the one and only tune he knew, "The
+Sailor's Hornpipe." Evidently things were coming well with them.
+
+For himself, he labored steadily and happily on for every yard of net
+pulled aboard yielded up at least a dozen silvery captives. Time flew
+with flying footsteps and when, at last, he straightened up to get
+a drink of water from his jug, he was surprised to see a gray light
+stealing over the waters. Day was breaking and the night had passed
+away. He could see Charley and the captain, plainly. Charley's net
+was all aboard and he was helping the old sailor with his. Both their
+skiffs lay dangerously low in the water. He glanced down at his own
+boat. Her gunwales were nearly level with the water under the weight of
+the fish in her, and he had still a hundred yards of net to pick up.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+A CUNNING TRICK.
+
+
+WALTER had still some seventy-five yards of his net in the water,
+when Charley, having finished with the captain, ran the launch down
+alongside of him. "Throw part of your fish in here and then just pull
+the rest of your net aboard," he directed. "Don't stop to pick out the
+fish. I'll do that on the way home. We've got to hustle and get those
+fish over to Clearwater. It is getting late and it will only take a
+short time longer to spoil them. Some have been out of water nearly all
+night."
+
+He and Walter changed places, and while Charley picked out the fish
+with nimble, skilful fingers, his chum started up the engine and headed
+the launch back for camp. The sun was well up when they reached it,
+and pausing only to empty the fish from the skiffs into the launch,
+the launch was headed across for Clearwater, leaving behind the three
+skiffs, and the captain to help Chris pull out the nets.
+
+"I wish I could let you stay behind and rest up," Charley told his
+chum, "but I have to have someone to stay in the launch while I go
+up to the fish house," and he told his experience of the day before
+which up to now he had not had the opportunity to relate. Walter was
+indignant over the underhanded trick and was frankly puzzled by the
+account of Chris' ghost.
+
+"It is certainly queer how we fall into difficulties in everything
+we undertake," he said. "Now, we have only been here a few days and
+already we are involved in a smuggling case, have had trouble with a
+gang of fishermen, and are tangled up in a ghost mystery. It does beat
+all how we always seem to get into trouble."
+
+"We have always been lucky in getting out of it," Charley reminded him.
+
+"Yes, but you know the old saying that 'the pitcher that goes often to
+the well is sure to get broken.'"
+
+"But the pitcher that does not go, gets no water," grinned Charley.
+"The facts are that we all want to be making big money in a short time
+and the big money lies in dangerous and unusual pursuits. If we stuck
+to the slow, well-beaten pursuits, we would have no more troubles than
+anyone else, I dare say."
+
+"Well, I am beginning to get wearied with too many adventures," Walter
+confessed. "If we pull out of this fishing business with a good sum
+to our credit, I'm going to hunt for some quiet pursuit like raising
+chickens or tending sheep."
+
+"We've got two months of the fishing season yet," remarked his chum,
+thoughtfully, "then comes the closed season when the law does not
+permit anyone to fish. Well, if we have good luck, we may make a fair
+bit in two months. Of course, we cannot expect many catches like last
+night's but we ought to make something right along if we work hard."
+
+Further conversation was ended by their arrival at the dock. Several
+fishermen were lounging on the pier and they crawled to the edge
+looking down with envious eyes at the launch's load. Among them,
+Charley noted Hunter's sallow, sneering face. He paused only to make
+the launch fast then hurried up for the fish house.
+
+Walter lay back on a seat and rested while he waited the arrival of
+the wagons. The fishermen, after a few idle questions as to where the
+catch had been made, and which way the fish had been working, gradually
+drifted away to their various duties, most of them heading for shore to
+work upon their nets and boats, but Hunter and a couple of companions
+disappeared in one of the shanties on the other side of the dock. "So
+that's where the rat lives," Walter reflected. "He would have a good
+chance to take a pot shot at me from there if he dared but he wouldn't
+try anything so raw as that. I don't believe he would take such a risk
+in broad daylight with so many around." The lad's meditations were
+interrupted by the arrival of the first wagon from the fish house.
+He helped to load it and as soon as it was gone settled back to his
+resting. As he lay back with every muscle gratefully relaxed, his quick
+ear caught a peculiar sound. On his guard from Charley's experience of
+the day before, he raised up and looked carefully around. The sound
+was easy to locate. It came from the shanty Hunter had entered. He
+could see something dripping down in large drops from the slat-like
+floor. "They have got a leaky water pail or something of the kind,"
+he guessed, then, as a peculiar smell was wafted to his nostrils, he
+lay back again with a grin. "Their gasoline can has sprung a leak,"
+he decided. "The gas is all running out. If it was anyone else but
+Hunter, I'd call and tell him about it, but as it is his, it can all
+leak away for all I care," and he lay back and listened with a certain
+satisfaction to the steady drip of the escaping fluid.
+
+Half dozing he heard footsteps in the shack and a moment later the
+scratch of a match. The next instant he was on his feet, his heart
+beating wildly. It had happened like a flash of lightning. All around
+the launch the water was aflame. Fool that he had been. He had been
+caught by a trick simple but cunning. That film of oil on the water had
+only needed a dropped match to set it aflame.
+
+For a moment he stood helpless, bewildered by the sudden catastrophe.
+The oil had drifted all around the launch and she was in the center of
+a sheet of flame. Already he could smell the blistering paint on her
+hull, and the heat smote him in the face like a fiery blast.
+
+Only for a moment he stood thus paralyzed. Then his wits, accustomed
+to work quickly in emergencies, swept back. With a leap, he gained the
+bow and with his sheath-knife severed the rope which held the launch
+to the dock. Springing back to the engine, he shoved on the switch and
+flung the fly wheel over. Instantly the motor began to throb and the
+threatened launch backed slowly out of the sheet of flame. Safe outside
+the danger zone, Walter shut off the engine and with his cap beat out
+the patches of flame that clung to the launch's sides. Then he leaned
+over and grimly inspected his craft. Ten minutes before she had been
+a dainty thing in her coat of white, now she looked like an ancient
+wreck with her scorched and smoke-grimed sides on which the melted
+paint hung in ugly, dropsical blisters. The worst of it was there was
+no redress for the damages done her. So cunning was the scheme that it
+bore all the semblance of an accident, though the wrathful lad knew
+it was anything but that. He could imagine scoundrels chuckling to
+themselves in the closed shack and his blood boiled in his veins. How
+we would like to repay them for the fright and damage. He sat down for
+a moment and strove to gain control of his temper for he realized that
+an outburst on his part would do no good and might make more trouble.
+As soon as he calmed down a bit, he started up the engine and worked
+the launch back to the dock.
+
+A wagon was waiting and its driver looked down in amazement at the
+sadly-altered launch. "What happened to you?" he questioned.
+
+"Some gasoline and a match," Walter replied, carelessly. "No damage
+done beyond some scorched paint. Please report it to Mr. Daniels and
+tell him we will repaint her as soon as there comes a spell of bad
+weather when we cannot fish."
+
+The driver departed with his load satisfied with the explanation for
+accidents were common amongst the fishing fleet.
+
+In half an hour longer the last of the fish had been carted away and
+Charley came hustling down with a beaming face, which fell as he caught
+sight of the launch. He asked no questions, however, but jumped aboard
+and shoved off. Once under way Walter enlightened him.
+
+"Those fellows are clever in their meanness," said Charley, with
+grudging admiration. "One would not think from Hunter's looks that he
+had much brains. We have certainly got to be on our guard every minute.
+That's twice in two days he has nearly put us out of business without
+exposing himself."
+
+"I wish we could get even with him," declared Walter, wrathfully.
+
+Charley grinned. "In a way we are even with him already. There must be
+five hundred dollars' worth of liquor in that cache and he dare not
+touch a bottle of it as long as we are on the island. Seriously though,
+I would give a good deal to catch him in such a way that we could have
+the law on him. Until we do, we will have to be watchful and avoid
+open trouble. He is pretty sure to make a slip sooner or later. The
+cleverest of rascals do, and then will be our chance if he does not get
+us first. I am beginning to understand why the rest of the fishermen
+stand in such fear of incurring his enmity. There is the captain and
+Chris waiting for us on the dock. I wonder what's the matter. They
+ought to have been through their work and the captain asleep long ago."
+
+By this time, they had drawn near to the little pier and could plainly
+see the little negro and the old sailor pacing about in evident
+excitement. In a few more minutes, the launch glided in alongside the
+dock and the cause of the excitement became apparent. The two were
+standing by a heap of broken splintered planks that had once been their
+extra skiff.
+
+"What does this mean?" demanded Charley, in deepest discouragement.
+
+"I dunno, Massa Chas," replied the grieved little negro, "but I s'pect
+hit's some ob dat white trash's doings. Late last night I hears a boat
+acoming. First off I thought hit was you-alls, but pretty soon I 'lowed
+it wasn't 'cause de engine didn't sound like yourn. Hit stopped at de
+dock an' I gets to a crack an' peeps out. Pretty soon hyar comes four
+fellows astealing up de path. I up an' hails 'em an' dey stops short.
+I guess dey had reckoned dat dar was no one hyar 'cause ob de launch
+being gone. I shoots off de rifle an' dey took to der heels. Pretty
+soon I hears a breaking noise down by de dock an' den de put-put ob der
+boat, as dey puts off. An' dis mornin' I finds de skiff jes' disaway."
+
+"And that ain't all," broke in Captain Westfield, pointing over to
+where their extra net lay on its rack of poles.
+
+The boys gave a gasp of dismay. The new unused net was a mass of
+hanging strips. It had been literally cut and hacked to pieces.
+
+"This sort of thing has got to stop," declared Charley, white with
+rage. "Our catch last night came to a hundred and fifty dollars but it
+will cost forty-five dollars to replace that skiff, fifty dollars to
+replace that net, and at least twenty dollars to repair the launch, and
+all that damage has been done in a few hours. Goodness knows what they
+will do to us next. Things cannot go on this way any longer."
+
+His companions looked at him questioningly but he shook his head
+disparagingly. "I haven't a ghost of an idea what to do," he admitted,
+gloomily. "Maybe a little sleep will clear my head and bring some plan.
+I'm going up and turn in."
+
+He staggered drunkenly as he made his way up to the cabin. He was
+utterly exhausted, nerve and body. Once inside, he flung himself upon
+his couch and was instantly asleep.
+
+Chris tried to arouse him for dinner but it was like trying to awaken
+one, dead. Nature was claiming her due.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+THE MYSTERY DEEPENS.
+
+
+IT was late in the afternoon when Charley at last awoke. The death-like
+sleep had done him a world of good and, except for stiffness and
+muscles that still ached, he felt his old self again.
+
+His companions were both up, moving about and he greeted them brightly.
+
+"I am feeling as fit as a fiddle," he declared. "As soon as I get a
+bite to eat I'll be ready for another night's fishing."
+
+"To-night is Saturday night," observed Captain Westfield, hesitatingly.
+"I don't want to stand in the way of making money, but I 'low it won't
+do no hurt for us to lay in to-night. We might get into a school that
+would keep us working all night, like last night, and it's noways right
+to work on the Lord's day."
+
+"That's right," agreed Charley, heartily, "I had lost track of the
+days. We will not go out again until midnight, Sunday night. I don't
+believe anyone ever really lost anything by obeying the Lord's command
+to keep his day holy."
+
+"Have you figured out any plan for dealing with the fishermen?" Walter
+inquired, anxiously.
+
+"Nothing very brilliant," his chum admitted. "One thing I think we had
+better do at once is to remove all that liquor to another hiding place
+and let them think we have destroyed it. It may make them feel more
+bitter toward us but they will no longer have a motive for driving us
+from the island. I would like to destroy it entirely but we have no
+right to do that. That is the sheriff's business. One thing, there is
+nothing like a good sleep to do away with worry and discouragement. I
+feel quite hopeful, now, but I was almost ready to quit this morning.
+After all I guess Hunter has done us about all the damage he can. Our
+other nets and boats we will always have with us and he will not have
+much chance to injure them if we keep watch of them. With the liquor
+gone, they will not be likely to bother us on the island, and, if they
+do, all we have will be in the cabin protected by a good rifle. Let's
+change the hiding place, now. We have time to do it before dark."
+
+His companions had no better plan to suggest so they readily agreed
+to his proposal. Taking with them some bits of thin boards for spades
+they sought the beach and turned into one of the paths that led to the
+buried liquor.
+
+"This smuggling business must have been going on for a long time
+judging from the number of these paths and the way they are worn,"
+Charley observed. "Hunter ought to be rich from the enormous profits he
+makes on the vile stuff. It can be bought for a dollar a gallon in Cuba
+and on this side, I believe, it retails for five dollars a gallon."
+
+"The man who follows an evil trade, seldom prospers," said Captain
+Westfield, sagely. "In the end he has to pay for his ill-gotten gains.
+Generally he has to pay in this life, and he always has to pay in the
+hereafter."
+
+"I believe you are right," Walter agreed. "I have noticed that
+saloon-keepers and that class never seem happy. Even those who make
+money seem to be cursed with drunken children or something equally bad,
+and if they have a shred of conscience, they must suffer terribly in
+secret for the misery they cause and the punishment they must expect in
+the life hereafter."
+
+This conversation had brought them to the cache, and, pulling off their
+coats, they fell to work with their rude spades.
+
+They worked with a will and sent the loose sand flying for the sun was
+sinking low and they wished to complete their task before dark. In a
+few minutes they had made a hole a couple of feet deep, and some ten
+feet across.
+
+"We ought to be down to it," said Charley, with a puzzled frown. "It
+must be covered deeper than I thought."
+
+They worked on for a few minutes longer, then Charley threw down the
+board with which he had been shoveling. "It has been taken away," he
+declared, voicing the conviction which had grown upon his companions.
+"They got it last night, after all, Chris."
+
+"I doan see how, Massa Chas," objected the little darkey, "I watched
+dem come up de path an' I watched dem run away."
+
+"They must have come back after you went to sleep," Charley said, but
+Chris shook his head decidedly.
+
+"I doan sleep none arter dat," he persisted. "I laid awake and watched
+de balance ob de night."
+
+"Maybe, they had a boat on the gulf beach, also," Walter suggested,
+"and while some of them drew attention to the dock, the others removed
+the stuff."
+
+"Well, anyway, it's gone, and I am glad of it," Charley said. "Maybe
+they will not trouble us any more now. I confess that they were
+beginning to get on my nerves. Let's go back to the cabin and get
+supper and have a good sleep. Thank goodness we will likely rest one
+night in peace."
+
+His companions were nothing loath for they had not yet got entirely
+over their aches and pains.
+
+The night passed away uneventfully and morning found them entirely
+their old selves once more.
+
+"We are over the worst part now," Charley assured them. "Of course we
+will often come in very tired but we will never again feel like we did
+those first two nights, and the longer we fish the less we will mind
+the labor."
+
+As soon as breakfast was over, Captain Westfield produced his old,
+well-worn Bible from which he was never separated and read a couple
+of chapters of the story of Him he loved with all his big, simple,
+trusting heart.
+
+The simple service was just over when they heard the throbbing of an
+engine and they hurried down to the dock just in time to greet the
+Roberts who had come over in their launch to pay them a friendly call.
+
+It was pleasant to our little party to see friendly faces and hear
+kindly conversation after all the roughness and suspicion they had met
+among the unfriendly fishermen. It was good to feel that they were not
+alone entirely in their new life and that there was someone who took a
+friendly interest in them and wished them well.
+
+They began to have a strong liking for the three sturdy brothers, they
+appeared so frank, open and sincere.
+
+Bill had brought over with him the rifle he had mentioned and presented
+it to them, together with a box of cartridges.
+
+He was deeply interested to learn that the liquor had been removed.
+
+"It is a queer thing," he remarked. "I saw the Hunter gang come in
+Friday night about midnight. I had got caught over to Clearwater with a
+loose shaft and I was working on it when their boat came in. I supposed
+they had been fishing and I glanced into their launch to see what they
+had caught. It was empty. Of course, they could have hidden a few
+bottles in the lockers but not any such amount as you say was buried
+here. They were all mad as the deuce and quarreling amongst themselves.
+I didn't get the shaft fixed until about two o'clock. Their boat was
+still at the dock when I left and I could hear them snoring in their
+shanty. Another thing, I was over again last night to see if our new
+nets had come and I couldn't help but notice that apparently there was
+no drinking going on. Saturday night is pay night, and, if Hunter had
+had that liquor, he would certainly have been handing it out on the
+quiet and there would have been more or less drunken men about."
+
+"Then who could have taken it, if the fishermen didn't?" demanded
+Charley, thoroughly puzzled.
+
+"Can't imagine, unless that ghost of Chris' did it," admitted Bill,
+with a grin. "That was a curious thing to happen, and if I did not
+know that you fellows are the truthful kind, I would believe you were
+trying to kid me with that yarn. We have been here some time, and we
+have never heard of any stranger on this island. Let's take a look
+over: it again and see if there is any cave or other place a man could
+hang out."
+
+The others readily agreed to his proposal, and all set out together
+for a closer exploration of the island. They made a thorough search
+from end to end, and from shore to shore, but could find no place a
+man could hide out or any trace of human habitation. The shores were
+sloping sand beaches without rocks or caves and the only growth was the
+scanty groups of palms.
+
+They returned to the cabin more mystified than ever for they had
+convinced themselves beyond doubt that they were the only occupants of
+the island.
+
+"Well, if the fishermen haven't got that liquor, I suppose we must look
+for more trouble," Charley sighed.
+
+"I expect you may," Bill agreed. "Even if they have got it, I guess,
+they would not give you a very long rest. As soon as it was gone, they
+would want to bring in more and this is the only island around with a
+good gulf beach to land the stuff on. Also it's the handiest and most
+convenient for their purposes."
+
+"Then it's a case of move or be in trouble all the time," said Walter,
+dubiously.
+
+"Yes, that's about it," Bill agreed.
+
+"We can't leave yet," said Charley, decidedly, "so we will have to
+take whatever is coming to us. If we could only catch them in the act
+of smuggling, we could get rid of them for good and be conferring a
+blessing on the rest of the fishermen besides."
+
+"That's the very thing I've been thinking of," Bill agreed. "Whether
+they got the liquor again or not, they are sure to try the game again
+as soon as they think it's safe. I've been doing considerable thinking
+about it since I talked to you before and I've got a scheme I think
+might work."
+
+He proceeded to unfold his plan while the others listened with eager
+interest.
+
+"It might work," said Charley, thoughtfully, "but, while we are
+waiting, they may do us all kinds of injuries."
+
+"That's a risk you are running, anyway," Bill reminded him, "and we
+Roberts will do all in our power to help you. Call on us any time, day
+or night, if you are in trouble and you will find us ready."
+
+Charley thanked him heartily for his offer and soon after the Roberts
+took their leave.
+
+The little party were still on the dock watching their launch out of
+sight when they noticed another launch put out from the Clearwater
+pier, and it soon became apparent that it was headed for their island.
+
+"It's Hunter's craft," announced Walter, as it drew nearer. "Looks as
+though he had waited for the Roberts to leave to pay us a visit."
+
+As the launch drew nearer they saw it contained but one person and that
+one Hunter himself.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+AN ACCIDENT.
+
+
+HUNTER greeted the little party with a smile intended to be pleasant
+but which resembled a grimace on his sallow, evil face.
+
+"Good day, and how are all of you this fine day. Well, I hope," he said.
+
+"We are all right," Charley answered, curtly. "What do you want?"
+
+"Which of you is the leader of this pleasant little party? I want a
+little business talk with the leader," he said, fawningly. "Just a
+little business talk. It won't take more than five minutes."
+
+"Wall," observed Captain Westfield, "when we are at sea I'm generally
+the head man, but hyar on shore an' at this fishing business, I reckon
+Charley thar does the leading."
+
+"And a good leader he is too, I'll bet," said Hunter, flatteringly.
+
+"Oh, cut out all the soft-soap business," said Charley, shortly,
+disgusted with the fellow's attempts at flattery. "If you have anything
+to say to us say it."
+
+"But it's a private business," Hunter protested. "Just let me talk to
+you alone for a few minutes."
+
+Charley was about to refuse the request but curiosity as to what Hunter
+wanted to say prevailed. With a wink at his chums he accompanied the
+fellow to one side, apart from his companions.
+
+"Now, say what you have to say and be quick about it," he said, curtly.
+
+Hunter hesitated a moment. "Suppose there was something on this island
+that I was interested in," he began.
+
+"There is," said Charley, with a grin, "but if you want to talk to me,
+talk plainly. I know you buried that aguardiente on the island."
+
+"All right, say I did," agreed Hunter, defiantly, dropping his friendly
+pose. "I don't mind saying I did to you. You can't make anything out
+of that. If you said I told you I did, I'd swear I didn't. That's why
+I wanted to talk to you alone. I wasn't hankering for any witnesses to
+our talk.
+
+"Might as well wait and hear what I have to say," he continued,
+doggedly, "because I won't say a word before the others."
+
+Charley had started to join his companions but he paused in indecision,
+and Hunter went on eagerly.
+
+"Say, I did put the stuff there. Say, I could make a lot of money off
+it right now. Say, I ain't going to dig it up with witnesses to see
+and testify agin me. Say, I'd give you fifty dollars to take your
+party off the island for one single night, one hundred dollars if you
+quit the island for good. What would you say to that, eh?"
+
+Charley considered for a moment. "Nothing doing," he replied, slowly.
+"In the first place, you and your gang have done us more than one
+hundred dollars' damage. No use denying it," he said, hotly, as Hunter
+protested his innocence. "You were pretty slick with your tricks but we
+know who has been responsible for our troubles. In the second place,
+to smuggle in and to sell liquor in a dry county is a felony. If we
+connived at we would be guilty also. Third, I wouldn't take your word
+for anything. Lastly, I don't know where the stuff is, anyway."
+
+"You lie!" snarled Hunter, his little black eyes flashing evilly. "You
+know where it is buried."
+
+Charley grew white around the lips. "Be careful what you say," he
+cautioned. "If you will just follow me, I'll show you something."
+
+He led the way in silence to where the liquor had been buried.
+
+At sight of the hole and the freshly upturned earth, Hunter grew livid
+with rage.
+
+"You've stole it, you've stole it," he gasped.
+
+"We have not touched the stuff," Charley denied. "If you fellows didn't
+remove it, I don't know who did."
+
+"A likely yarn," Hunter sneered. "Nobody knew it was on the island
+except you and us." He conquered his rage with an effort. "Say," he
+said, "let's be partners in this. You can't sell the stuff like we can.
+You don't know the fellows who will buy and keep their mouths shut like
+we do. I tell you, even we, have to be mighty careful. Why, you'd get
+arrested before you got it half sold out. Let's be partners; that's
+fair. There's good money in it. You fellows could tend to the running
+of it and we could do the selling. We would split the profits up even."
+
+His earnestness convinced the lad that Bill Roberts was right. The
+fishermen had not got the liquor.
+
+"I have told you the truth, Hunter," he said. "We have not got the
+stuff and we do not know who has."
+
+"You're holding out on us," Hunter fairly screamed. "You are trying to
+hog the whole thing. All right, young fellow, what we will do to you
+will be a plenty. We haven't started on you good, yet. We'll make you
+regret the day you were born before we are through with you."
+
+"Get off this island," commanded Charley, his patience at an end. "Try
+all your tricks you want to. We are on the watch for them now. Sometime
+you'll make a slip and we'll take a turn. Now go!"
+
+Hunter walked down to his boat sullenly, muttering oaths and threats
+that Charley ignored.
+
+"That fellow is cunning," the lad said, as he related the conversation
+to his companions. "He admitted everything, but the admission does us
+no good. He would swear he had said nothing of the kind and the rest of
+you could not testify for you did not hear his words."
+
+The incident depressed the spirits of all. They had begun to think the
+persecutions were over and now they threatened to begin afresh.
+
+"Well, there is no help for it," said Charley. "We will have to endure
+it until we get our plan to working. We will just have to be on our
+guard day and night until it is settled. Let's turn in now and forget
+it while we catch a nap. We will need the rest if we are going out at
+midnight."
+
+They had no watch amongst them but Charley possessed the not uncommon
+gift of being able to wake at any hour he desired. When he awoke he
+satisfied himself by a glance at the stars that he was not mistaken in
+the hour and then aroused his companions.
+
+As the time was short before daylight, they ran but a little way from
+the dock before anchoring the launch and taking to the boats.
+
+They had hardly got fairly started with the skiffs when Charley called
+a halt.
+
+"See anything over where you are, Walt?" he called.
+
+"Yes," shouted back his chum, eagerly, "the water is alive with fish of
+some kind."
+
+"Same here," Charley stated, "but I can't make out just what they are.
+They are not catfish, and yet, they don't fire just like mullet. Let's
+try them with just a little piece of our nets and see what they are
+before we make a big circle."
+
+They had run out but a few yards of net when he gave the signal to
+close up. "We will not drum up any," he said, as he halted his boat
+just inside the little circle. "We will get enough in the nets,
+without, to tell what they are and will not frighten the rest of the
+school."
+
+A few minutes sufficed to pick up the few yards of net they had out.
+Charley scanned his puzzledly as it came inboard. It contained no fish
+but was filled with great gaping holes here and there.
+
+"Not a scale," he announced, disgustedly. "Did you fellows get
+anything?"
+
+"Nothing but a lot of holes," said Captain Westfield.
+
+"I've got a lot of the queerest looking fish I ever saw," Walter
+exclaimed. "Row over and take a look at them. One of them bit me. Gee!
+but it hurts!"
+
+A few strokes of his oars brought Charley alongside and he peeped over
+into his chum's skiff.
+
+A score of big, eel-like, repulsive-looking creatures squirmed in the
+bottom.
+
+One glance and Charley, chucking his anchor aboard Walter's skiff,
+sprang into it.
+
+"Quick, show me where it bit you!" he cried.
+
+Walter held out a hand in the palm of which a tiny puncture oozed out
+occasional drops of blood.
+
+Charley whipped out a cord from his pocket, bound it loosely around the
+wrist of the wounded hand and thrusting an oarlock in the slack twisted
+it around until the cord dented into the flesh. "Now, stick your hand
+over into the water and keep it there," he commanded.
+
+Seizing an oar, he gingerly ladled the repulsive-looking creature out
+of the skiff.
+
+"Whew! My arm aches clear up to the shoulder!" Walter exclaimed. "What
+were those nasty-looking fish, anyway?"
+
+"Morays, a kind of salt water eel," said his chum, gravely. "I don't
+want to frighten you, dear old chum, but those things are poisonous,
+almost as poisonous as a snake."
+
+Walter received the startling information coolly. "I suspected they
+were poisonous as soon as my arm began to ache," he said, quietly.
+"Will I lose my hand do you think?"
+
+"I guess not," lied Charley, cheerfully. He could not bear to tell him
+that he was likely to lose his life as well as his hand.
+
+Calling the captain to follow, the lad rowed the two skiffs to the
+launch, made them fast, and helped his chum aboard. As soon as the
+captain fastened on, he started the engine and headed the launch back
+for the dock. He was thankful that they had not come far from home,
+for, short as the distance was, before they reached the little pier,
+Walter's arm had swollen to twice its natural size and he had fallen
+into a kind of listless stupor. The captain and Charley helped him
+tenderly out of the launch and supported him up to the cabin where they
+laid him out on his couch.
+
+Charley looked about in helpless despair. "If I only had some of that
+aguardiente, now, there would be a good chance to save him," he said,
+bitterly. "I don't think there was time for much of that poison to get
+into his circulation before I got the cord around his wrist and shut it
+off. Well, it isn't much use, but we will make a fight for it. Chris,
+heat up some water, quick, and make a big pot of coffee, as strong as
+you can make it."
+
+The little negro flew to do his bidding and, in a few minutes, Charley
+had the wounded hand plunged in a bucket of scalding hot water and
+was forcing cup after cup of strong, steaming coffee down his chum's
+throat.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+MORE MYSTERIES.
+
+
+"WE have got to get a doctor just as quick as we can," Charley
+declared. "I wish you could go, Captain. I would rather be with him and
+do what little I can for him. I'm afraid he will not last till you can
+get a doctor over here."
+
+"But I do not know how to run the launch," the old sailor reminded him.
+
+"That is so, I will have to go," agreed the lad. "Well, I guess, you
+can do as much for him as I could. Keep his hand in hot water all the
+time and keep forcing the coffee down him every few minutes. I'll be
+back as quick as I can."
+
+Seizing his hat Charley started for the dock on a run.
+
+In a few minutes he was back, consternation on his face.
+
+"Something's broke about the engine," he cried, "I can't start it up
+and I can't see to fix it in the dark. You'll have to go over in one of
+the skiffs, Captain. You will make better time than I could for you row
+better."
+
+The old sailor was out and gone almost before he finished speaking, and
+in a minute Charley could hear the quick stroke of oars coming from the
+water.
+
+"Do you think Massa Walt's goin' to die, Massa Chas?" Chris inquired in
+an awed whisper as they watched the stupefied lad.
+
+"I am afraid so, Chris," Charley said, sadly. "Some of that awful
+poison has got into his blood. It checks the heart action. That is what
+I am giving the coffee for. It stimulates the heart and makes it work
+faster. But it is not powerful enough to overcome the deadening effect
+of the poison. It needs a powerful heart stimulant to do that. Whiskey
+would do fairly well. Oh! how I wish I had a couple of bottles of that
+aguardiente now!"
+
+He lapsed into silence and sat sorrowfully watching his stricken chum,
+while Chris crouched at his side, deepest grief on his little ebony
+face.
+
+Suddenly there came a sharp rap at the door, and Charley sprang to his
+feet.
+
+"It can't be the doctor so quick," he said. "Come in," he called out.
+
+There was no answer to his invitation and stepping to the door he flung
+it open.
+
+Nothing but blank darkness greeted his searching eyes.
+
+He stepped outside and looked around but the darkness was so dense he
+could not see twenty feet from the cabin.
+
+Puzzled, he was turning back into the cabin when his foot came into
+contact with something on the step. He picked the object up and bore it
+to the light.
+
+One glance and he gave a shout of joy. "Aguardiente, Chris," he cried.
+"May the Lord bless whoever put it there."
+
+He seized a cup and pouring it half full of the fiery liquor forced it
+down his chum's throat.
+
+He allowed a half hour to pass by, then administered another dose.
+
+At times he fancied he could trace a slight return of color in his
+chum's pale face but, if any, it was so slight that he could not be
+certain.
+
+At the end of an hour he gave a third stiff dose of the powerful
+stimulant.
+
+"I wish the captain would get here with the doctor," he said,
+anxiously. "I can't see as he is improving any. I fancy most that stuff
+is doing is to help keep him from slipping away from us."
+
+"Dat's de captain, now," Chris said, joyfully, as there came a brisk
+rap at the door.
+
+It was not the captain but a young, athletic-looking man bearing a
+small, black, leather case.
+
+"I am the doctor," he announced. "How is the boy? Still alive?"
+
+"Yes, he is still living," said Charley, in relief, "but I don't think
+he will last much longer unless you can help him."
+
+"What have you done for him?" the doctor inquired, as he knelt by the
+stricken lad and felt his pulse.
+
+Charley told him briefly.
+
+"Very good," the doctor commented. "Probably he would have died before
+now but for those aids. He is pretty far gone but maybe we can pull him
+around."
+
+He laid off his coat and went to work. From his case he produced a
+hypodermic syringe and a box of tablets. "Some warm water and a spoon,"
+he requested.
+
+Chris was instantly at his side with the required articles.
+
+He filled the spoon with warm water and dropped one of the tablets into
+it. It colored the water a beautiful scarlet.
+
+"Permanganate of potash," he explained. "You fishermen ought to keep
+some always by you. It's invaluable in cases of snake-bites or other
+poisonous wounds."
+
+He filled his syringe from the spoon and baring Walter's arm injected
+it into a vein.
+
+"I expect your warm water treatment has drawn most of the poison from
+the wound, but we had better be on the safe side," he observed.
+
+He partly filled a basin with warm water and dissolved another of the
+tablets in it. Then, with his keen, surgeon's lancet, he cut open the
+flesh around the puncture, washed it out thoroughly with the solution,
+and then bound it up in soft, white gauze.
+
+"That is all we can do, now, but watch," he observed, when he had
+finished.
+
+He sat down with Walter's wrist in his hand and waited the effect of
+the treatment.
+
+"He is responding to the injection nobly," he said at last. "His pulse
+is getting quicker and his skin is becoming moist. Evidently there is
+not as much poison in the blood as I feared. Your prompt action has
+undoubtedly saved his life."
+
+In half an hour he gave another injection and watched the result with
+satisfaction.
+
+"Your friend is going to come out all right," he declared, cheerily.
+
+A wave of relief swept over Charley. "We can never fully pay you for
+what you have done," he said, with a lump in his throat. "Money can
+never square the debt."
+
+"That's all right," said the young doctor, heartily. "It's a matter of
+more than mere pay to most of us doctors when we are able to save a
+valuable life. I can do no more for your friend at present, but I'll
+leave some tablets with you to give him from time to time. I think the
+danger is over, although he will be a pretty sick boy for a couple of
+days from the reaction of the liquor and drugs he has taken, as well as
+from the poison itself, but with good nursing, he will pull through all
+right."
+
+Counting out some tiny tablets, he gave them to Charley, seized his
+hat and case, and with a cheery "good night" opened the door and
+disappeared in the darkness.
+
+He had been gone a full five minutes before Charley recalled that in
+his anxiety for his chum he had forgotten to ask his name or the amount
+of his bill.
+
+"Not very polite, but the captain will find that out," he consoled
+himself. "I wonder why the captain did not come up with him. I suppose
+the dear old chap could not bear the sight of Walter's lying so
+death-like. Chris, make up some more good, strong coffee and cook some
+breakfast. The captain's going to be all worn out when he gets back."
+
+Daylight was near at hand and with it came the old sailor, looking
+pale, worn and haggard in the morning light.
+
+"Is Walter dead?" he greeted, in a trembling, anxious voice.
+
+Charley laughed in sheer joyousness. "Dead nothing," he exulted. "He's
+getting better every minute. Why, didn't the doctor tell you that?"
+
+"I couldn't find the doctor," said the old sailor, in relief. "There
+was none in Clearwater. I got up the telegraph agent and got him to
+telegraph to Tarpon Springs for one. He'll come on the noon train. It
+was the best I could do. I waited to hear from the telegram, that's
+what's kept me so long."
+
+Charley stared at him. "Do you mean that you did not bring over the
+doctor that was here?"
+
+"Are you crazy or am I?" demanded the old sailor. "What do you mean?"
+
+"There was a doctor came about an hour after you left," said Charley,
+slowly. "He staid at least two hours. He gave Walter medicine which has
+pulled him through. He only left about an hour ago."
+
+It was the captain's turn to stare. "I'll be jiggered," he said in awe,
+"and I saw no motor boat going or coming. Who was he, and how in the
+world did he know we needed him?"
+
+Charley shook his head. "I'll give it up," he said. "However, he'll be
+back again and will solve the mystery."
+
+But the doctor did not reappear. However, the noon train brought a
+physician from Tarpon Springs. Charley, who, by daylight, had easily
+found and repaired the engine break, went over in the launch and got
+him.
+
+The new doctor was visibly annoyed when he examined Walter. "I do not
+understand why I was called on this case," he said, shortly. "The boy
+is out of all danger. He has had skilful treatment, most skilful
+treatment. I would not have come had I known there was already a doctor
+in charge."
+
+Charley explained the circumstances.
+
+"Your description fits, perfectly, Doctor Thompson of Tarpon Springs,"
+the new doctor observed. "Did he have a finger missing on the left
+hand?"
+
+"He did, the second finger," said Charley, recalling the circumstance.
+
+The doctor studied the lad's face closely, started to speak, but
+checked himself.
+
+He was silent during all the trip back to Clearwater but after he got
+out of the launch he turned and faced Charley.
+
+"Young man," he said, coldly, "I do not know what your object was in
+telling me that string of lies, but I want to impress upon you that you
+have not deceived me."
+
+Charley stared at him in hurt astonishment.
+
+"Doctor Thompson dined with me last night," said the physician, icily.
+"We sat together after and talked in my study until one o'clock. At two
+o'clock, you say, he was at your camp, an impossible thing for Tarpon
+Springs is twenty miles away."
+
+With a curt nod he turned and strode up the dock leaving behind him an
+offended, astonished, mystified boy.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+MORE MISCHIEF.
+
+
+ALL the way back to the island, Charley pondered over the mystifying
+occurrence.
+
+"I don't understand it, I don't understand it at all," he said to
+Captain Westfield whom he found sitting beside Walter who was still
+sleeping soundly. "There is some mystery about this island that puzzles
+me. If this sort of thing goes on I'll be converted to Chris' belief in
+spirits. One unexplainable thing after another happening so frequently
+is enough to make one lose his wits."
+
+"I wouldn't worry my head about it," said the old sailor, placidly.
+"The mysterious happenings have all been for our own good. Take this
+last one. Walter would surely have died but for that liquor and the
+doctor. I don't fear the kind of people or spirits that do that kind of
+thing. It's the mean, sly tricks of those fishermen that's bothering
+me. I cannot help but worry as to what they will do next. Just how do
+we stand now, do you calculate, lad?"
+
+Charley figured rapidly. "Our two nights' fishing makes one hundred and
+eighty dollars coming to us. I guess our grocery bills amount to about
+thirty dollars, it will cost forty-five dollars to replace the skiff,
+that ruined net means fifty dollars more, and repainting the launch
+will cost twenty dollars more. Our other three nets are as good as new.
+That brings our total expenses up to one hundred and forty dollars,
+leaving a balance of forty dollars to our credit."
+
+"I wish it were a little more," said the captain, wistfully. "If it
+was twenty dollars apiece, I would vote right now for giving up this
+fishing business. I've got a feeling that those fishermen are going
+to do us bad yet. They have pretty near succeeded a couple of times
+already. Next time we may not be lucky enough to escape. Bill Roberts'
+scheme might work all right, but it will take time and there's no
+telling what they may do to us while we are waiting."
+
+"I hate to give up," Charley replied, "but I guess it is the wisest
+thing to do; so far, they have only injured our property, but there is
+no telling how soon they will do some one of us bodily injury, they are
+getting desperate. This accident to Walt has made me see things in a
+different light. I would never forgive myself if one of you should be
+badly injured by those scoundrels as a result of my being stubborn and
+refusing to quit. If it were only myself it would be different, but,
+I do not want to drag the rest of you into the trouble. Walt's close
+shave has taken all the fighting spirit out of me. I agree with you
+that we had better quit. But we cannot strike out again with only forty
+dollars between us. It will be several days anyway before Walt is able
+to travel and we might as well put in as much of the time as we can
+fishing. We can notify those fishermen that we are going to leave soon
+and perhaps they will let up on their persecutions."
+
+"Where had we better go from here?" speculated the old sailor.
+
+"Back to the East Coast, I guess," answered Charley, wearily. "It's
+pineapple season and we will be able to get work in the plantations,
+I guess. They only pay a dollar and a half per day and the work is
+very hard. But this is the dull season in Florida now and we can't do
+better. I don't know as it much matters what we do," he concluded,
+bitterly. "We seem doomed to fail in all our undertakings."
+
+"Get that idea out of your head, lad," said the old sailor, gently. "If
+one lacks confidence, he will never succeed. You are tired out and your
+nerves are all unstrung from worry and loss of sleep. Go take a walk
+on the beach and a dip in the surf then come back and catch a nap and
+things will look brighter."
+
+His eyes followed Charley's departing form with pitying fondness.
+
+"Poor lad," he sighed, "he hates to give up, and he is thoroughly
+discouraged. It isn't often he gets that way though the good Lord
+knows he has but little to keep him bright and cheerful. No father, no
+mother, and his whole young life a constant battle against hardships
+and disappointments."
+
+When Charley returned his gloominess had vanquished. "Nothing like good
+salt air and a long swim to get the best of the blues, Captain," he
+announced, cheerfully. "I feel fit to do battle with the world again
+now. How's the boy coming on?"
+
+"Fine," the captain declared. "I'm expecting him to wake up hungry."
+
+"I'll be fixed for him, sho'," declared Chris, eagerly. "Dis has been
+de longest day for dis nigger, he jus' seemed to be in the way an' ob
+no account, so he's jus' been fixing up to feed you-all, dat does all
+de work, jus' de best he kin. Golly I got a supper dat will satisfy
+Massa Walt all right. I got fresh fish fried nice and brown, big fat
+oysters from off de rocks roasted in dere own juice, scallops chopped
+up fine and made inter meat balls, nice fresh corn bread an' plenty of
+coffee."
+
+"It would kill Walt to eat all that," laughed Charley. "Make up a
+little oyster soup and we will give him that when he wakes up. Your
+feast will not be wasted," he said hastily, as he saw the little
+negro's look of disappointment. "You want to remember that the captain
+and I haven't eaten since yesterday."
+
+"Dat's so," agreed Chris, brightening. "Hit's all ready when you is."
+
+He had little cause for complaint for when the two had finished there
+was little but crumbs left of the delicious meal.
+
+"Now I am ready to sleep," Charley announced, with a sigh of content.
+
+Walt was resting so easily that both Charley and the captain stretched
+out on their couches leaving Chris to watch and to call one of them to
+take his place when he became sleepy.
+
+The captain relaxed his tired muscles with a sigh of relief.
+
+"There's one thing that's been puzzling me a little, Charley," he
+observed, as he settled into a comfortable position. "How did it happen
+that Walt caught all those critters while you and I got nothing but
+holes."
+
+"I hadn't thought of that," admitted Charley, thoughtfully. "It is kind
+of queer; something jumped up, fish all bore down on one net, but,
+while that would account for Walt getting them all in his net, it does
+not explain all the holes in ours."
+
+It was a trifling circumstance but he puzzled over it a long time after
+his companion had fallen asleep.
+
+The sun was shining brightly when the two awoke for Chris, with
+unselfish kindness, had watched the night through rather than disturb
+them.
+
+They found Walter awake and greatly improved, the swelling in his arm
+and hand was subsiding rapidly. He was very weak and was shaky from the
+effects of the drugs and liquor but that would soon wear off.
+
+They were hardly dressed when the Roberts arrived in their launch.
+They had heard of Walter's accident in Clearwater and had come over to
+inquire after him and offer any assistance they could give.
+
+"Too bad," said Bill, regretfully, when the captain told him of their
+newly-formed resolve to leave the Island. "We Roberts are sorry to lose
+you folks. I wish you could stick it out, but, of course, you know your
+own business best. We will not only miss you but we hate to see that
+Hunter gang win another underhand victory. With you gone they will take
+up their old trade of smuggling in booze and making beasts of their
+fellow fishermen."
+
+"It is too bad," the old sailor agreed, "but it is best for us to go
+before they do us any more harm. We have more coming to us than we owe
+now, but if they got to us with many more of their tricks, we would be
+behind with the fish house and then of course we could not go."
+
+"Well," Bill Roberts offered, as they were leaving, "if you are going
+out fishing to-night I'll come over and stay with the boy."
+
+Our friends accepted his offer gratefully, for they had been loath to
+think of leaving their chum alone with Chris, only. It was true he was
+doing finely but there might come a change for the worse and the little
+negro would be helpless to get word to them.
+
+True to his promise, Bill appeared before sundown and they were free
+for another hunt for the finny prizes.
+
+They were not long in coming upon a promising-looking school of fish
+which Charley decided to run.
+
+Walter's absence made a slight difference in the mode of making the
+circle, but they got around most of the bunch in good shape.
+
+"I believe we are going to make a good haul," Charley declared, with
+satisfaction, as they rested after drumming up. "There's a lot of fish
+in the circle and they seem to be hitting the net good."
+
+But his hopes gave way to dismay as he pulled in yard after yard of
+his net without getting a fish. Instead the net seemed riddled with a
+multitude of holes.
+
+"Get anything, Captain," he paused to shout.
+
+"Nothing but holes," said the old sailor, disgustedly. "Got a hundred
+of them."
+
+"Queer," Charley muttered. He gathered up some of the loose webbing
+in either hand and pulled gently. The tested part broke as easily as
+a spider's web. Every few yards for the entire length of the net he
+repeated the operation. The result was always the same. He finished
+picking up and, sitting down, waited dejectedly for the old sailor.
+
+"We might as well go home," he said wearily, as the captain pulled
+alongside. "My net is rotten from end to end. It would not hold a
+minnow."
+
+"Mine is in the same fix," his companion agreed, sadly. "Now, we are
+in a bad fix. One hundred dollars' worth more nets to be charged up
+against us, and nothing to fish with."
+
+"We are in a bad fix," Charley agreed. "I don't understand it. Those
+were both new nets, and of the highest grade of twine. They should have
+lasted for at least three months and here they are gone after only a
+few nights' fishing. There is something wrong somewhere. Well, come on,
+let's go home. There is nothing to be gained trying to fish with these
+nets, they will not hold anything."
+
+The trip back to camp was made in silence; they were too utterly
+discouraged for speech.
+
+They found Walter sleeping peacefully and Bill Roberts sitting by his
+couch reading by the light of a lantern.
+
+The big fishermen listened in wondering sympathy to the recital of
+their experiences.
+
+"Those nets should have lasted at least three months," he declared,
+confirming Charley's statement. "They are good nets. Mr. Daniels is a
+square fish boss and does not give his fishermen anything but the best.
+Let's see if we can find out what has happened to them. That will not
+make them strong again, but it will be of some little satisfaction."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+TELLING MR. DANIELS.
+
+
+"THERE are several things that can happen to a net to make it rot
+quickly," Bill said. "Little things that a greenhorn might not think of
+any consequence. Now, first, have you run into any big bunches of gilly
+fish?"
+
+"No," Charley answered, "we have been lucky in that respect. I know why
+you ask the question. The slime from them catches in the knots of the
+meshes and unless well washed out will hasten their decay."
+
+"Correct," agreed Bill. "Then it is not gilly fish that done that
+damage. Next, have you been hauling your nets out to dry as soon as you
+got in, mornings."
+
+"Yes, they have been on the racks drying before the sun got up good.
+I've fished enough to know that a hot sun on a wet, heaped-up net will
+cause the twine to heat and rot quickly."
+
+"Well, that does away with another possibility," Bill said. "One of the
+most frequent causes of net trouble lies with the liming of them."
+
+"Yes, I know," the lad agreed. "Some mix the lime with water in their
+skiffs and throw it on the nets before it has time to slack thoroughly
+and it then burns up the twine. But that isn't the trouble. I was
+careful about that. I fixed up a barrel on the dock before we started
+in to fish. And every night before we started out I would put in a
+bucket of lime and fill the barrel up with water. Our nets were limed
+in the morning from that barrel. At least, I am pretty sure they were.
+I told Chris to do it. He has tended to the nets."
+
+"Sho', I always used dat water in de barrel," agreed the little darkey.
+"Only trouble was dat dar wasn't ebber enough ob it to dose all three
+nets good. By de time I got your's and de captain's fixed good, I'd
+have to put in more water to hab enough for Massa Walt's net."
+
+"There is your trouble right in that lime barrel," said Bill, with
+certainty. "It was always weakened down for Walter's net, and you say
+his net is all right yet."
+
+But Charley protested. "I never made the mixture strong enough to do
+any harm in the first place."
+
+"I'm going to take a look," announced Bill, picking up the lantern.
+"Everything points to that lime water and it must be it."
+
+The three followed in his wake as he led the way down to the dock.
+
+He examined the nets first. "Gee," he exclaimed, "I should say they
+were rotten. Let's have a look at Walter's."
+
+He stepped over to the rack where hung the lad's net and tested several
+meshes. "It is not as bad as those others," he announced. "Still it is
+getting pretty weak, I don't believe it would last out if a good school
+of fish struck it. Now let's look into that lime-water barrel."
+
+He plunged his arm down in the partly-filled barrel and felt the water
+tentatively.
+
+"Where do you keep your barrel of lime?" he asked, as he straightened
+up.
+
+"Right there on shore under that palm tree," Charley pointed out. "Want
+to look at the lime?"
+
+"No," said the big fisherman, absently, "I've seen enough."
+
+He led the way back to the cabin in silence.
+
+"Well, what do you make of it?" Charley asked when they were seated
+once more inside.
+
+"I'm sure sorry for you, fellows," blurted out the big fisherman,
+impulsively. "You've been played as mean a low-down trick as was ever
+played on anyone."
+
+"How?" demanded the captain and Charley together.
+
+"Someone has mixed potash in with the lime in your lime barrel, and
+it's just eaten the life out of your twine. It has been done to
+fishermen more than once around here and by that same gang of rascals.
+It never occurred to me that it had been done to your net, though, till
+I felt of that water. Lime water should feel harsh and gritty, but that
+felt oily and soapy and I knew then what the trouble was.
+
+"I wish I could help you out," he said, feelingly, noting the utter
+discouragement in the three faces. "I would gladly lend you nets if we
+had any but our old ones are all fished out and we have only three new
+ones ordered. It was so near the end of the season we did not order any
+extra ones."
+
+"We are mighty grateful to you anyway," Captain Westfield said. "You
+mustn't mind if we ain't very pleasant company just now. This last
+business has put us in a bad fix and we have got to study some way out
+of it."
+
+"I know," agreed Bill, sympathetically, "and as I can't do any good
+here now, I'll run over to camp and turn in. I've got to go over to
+Clearwater in the morning to tend to a little pressing business.
+Anything I can get you there?"
+
+"No," Charley said, thanking him, "we have got to go over ourselves
+to-morrow and tell Mr. Daniels about the nets."
+
+When the kindly-hearted fisherman was gone, the three sat long debating
+gloomily what they should do but arriving at no decision. "We might as
+well turn in," said Captain Westfield at last. "Thar's only one thing
+I can see clearly. We must go to Mr. Daniels to-morrow, like men, and
+tell him about our loss. If he can give us any work to do, we must take
+it and work until we have paid him every cent we owe, if it takes a
+year to do it."
+
+His two companions heartily agreed to this statement. It was clearly
+the only honest course to take.
+
+It was late when they at last got to sleep, and consequently late when
+they awoke.
+
+As soon as they had breakfasted, Charley and the captain started for
+Clearwater, leaving Chris to look after Walter's wants.
+
+On the Clearwater dock they found Bill Roberts and his two brothers.
+
+"I'll keep an eye on your launch until you come back, if both of you
+want to go up to the fish house," Bill offered, a proposal they gladly
+accepted.
+
+For a wonder Mr. Daniels was not busy and Charley poured out the story
+of their losses in a manly, straightforward manner.
+
+"We don't want you to think that we are asking you to take up our
+quarrels for us," he concluded, flushing. "We simply want to make it
+plain that we have done the very best we knew how. As we figure it, we
+owe you now about one hundred and fifty dollars which the prospects do
+not look very bright for our paying at present. If you have any work
+we can do, we will gladly work out the debt. If not, we will have to
+wait until we can get to earning again. But we will pay you every cent
+just as soon as we possibly can."
+
+"Don't worry your head about the debt," said Mr. Daniels, heartily.
+"I am sure you and your companions have done your best and I am truly
+sorry you have met with so many misfortunes. What you owe the fish
+house can stand until you are able to pay it. If I owned the business,
+I would cancel the debt entirely but I am only manager here."
+
+"You are very kind to take it this way," Charley said, gratefully. "I
+was afraid you might be angry at the failure we have made."
+
+Mr. Daniels smiled. "What you have told me about your troubles is not
+exactly news to me," he said. "You have good friends in those Roberts
+boys and they have kept me pretty well posted as to how things were
+going. I would have got rid of that Hunter gang long ago but they are
+deeply in debt to the Company and the only chance to get any of it back
+is to take out a little, each week, from the fish they catch. You see,
+I have got to consider the Company's interests always above my personal
+wishes.
+
+"What concerns me most, now," he continued, "is what you and your
+friends are going to do now that your nets are gone. Bill Roberts was
+up to tell me this morning that If I would let you have another set of
+nets he would stand good for them. But I told him that was unnecessary.
+I would gladly refit you again on my own responsibility if I had nets,
+but we have not got another one in the house. Have you any plan for the
+future?"
+
+"No very clear one," Charley admitted. "As you know it's Florida's dull
+season now. There's very little doing except in the pineapple fields."
+
+Mr. Daniels considered for a few minutes. "I do not like to advise you
+to do it, because it's dangerous work, but there is one thing you might
+pick up enough money at to tide you over the dull season."
+
+"What is it?" Captain Westfield demanded, eagerly.
+
+"Hook and line fishing for groupers and grunts out in the gulf. After
+all, I do not know as it is very dangerous if one keeps close watch of
+the weather."
+
+"The captain here is a regular weather prophet," Charley asserted. "He
+can smell bad weather hours before it comes."
+
+"That's a valuable gift for that kind of work," Mr. Daniels replied.
+"The grouper banks lay out in the gulf from eight to eleven miles from
+shore, and it wouldn't do for a small boat to be caught out there in a
+heavy squall. The more I think of it, the more I think it would be a
+good thing for you. You can keep right on using the launch, and the
+hooks and lines you need will cost but little. Of course, there is
+no big fortune in it but you had ought to make more than wages. Very
+likely, you could earn enough to pull out of the hole."
+
+"I reckon we'd better try it," said Captain Westfield. "I've done a lot
+of hook and line fishing in my time."
+
+"We can start to-morrow," Charley agreed, promptly, his spirits rising
+at the possibility of a way out of their difficulties.
+
+"Very well," agreed Mr. Daniels. "I'll give you a note to the
+store-keeper to let you have the lines and tackles, as well as what
+more groceries you need."
+
+"I would feel quite hopeful," said Charley, as he thanked the
+kind-hearted manager, "if I did not fear that Hunter would find some
+way of still further injuring us."
+
+"Silas Hunter will not bother you for a couple of weeks, anyway," Mr.
+Daniels assured him. "They took him and a couple of his cronies to the
+Tampa hospital on this morning's train."
+
+"Sick?" Captain Westfield inquired, with great relief.
+
+"You might call it that," Mr. Daniels smiled. "Bill Roberts got so mad
+over what he had done to you boys that he came over this morning and
+gave him a licking he'll not forget in a hurry. Some of the gang tried
+to interfere and Bill's brothers gave them a dose of the same medicine.
+Those boys are good friends of yours, and they are friends worth
+having."
+
+"Will not Hunter have them arrested?" inquired Charley, in fear for his
+zealous friends.
+
+Mr. Daniels' smile broadened. "I think not," he said. "Bill warned him
+if he did, he would repeat the operation over again."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+THE GROUPER BANKS.
+
+
+"WE are grateful for what you did in our behalf," said Charley, when
+they again came upon the Roberts on the dock. "We did not expect you to
+take up our troubles but we cannot find words to express our gratitude
+for what you have done for us."
+
+Big Bill blushed like a school girl. "We didn't do much," he said,
+awkwardly. "I was going to do it anyway, sometime. It just came off a
+little sooner than I expected. I don't fancy fighting much--it's poor
+business--but it's the only way to handle fellows like that Hunter
+gang--a decent man can't stoop to meet them with their own tricks."
+
+"It is a rather primitive way of righting wrongs, but I was not
+thinking of that," said Charley, earnestly. "I was thinking of the
+loyal friendship, and the kindly feeling you had for us that prompted
+the act. It was a big, friendly action, all the more so as we are
+almost strangers to you."
+
+"That's all right," stammered Bill, embarrassed by his thanks. "I
+guess I beat Hunter up more than I intended to. He drew a knife on me
+so I couldn't handle him very gently. What did the fish boss have to
+say?" he inquired, eager to change the subject.
+
+The captain told him of the new plan that Mr. Daniels had suggested.
+
+"Mr. Daniels is a mighty square man," said Bill, emphatically. "I am
+glad you are going to follow his advice. We are thinking some of trying
+the reef fishing, too, until our nets come, so we will likely see a
+good deal of each other."
+
+"The more the pleasanter for us at any rate," declared the old sailor.
+"Well, I guess we must be going. Chris will be wondering what has
+happened to us. Good-by. Drop in on us when you get the chance."
+
+The trip back to the island was made with lighter hearts than they had
+brought with them, and they were made still lighter at the sight of
+Walter's improved condition. He was sitting up in bed arguing warmly
+with Chris that he was well enough to get up and dress, but the little
+negro had hidden his clothes and could not be moved by threats or
+entreaties.
+
+"No, Massa Walt," Chris was saying as they entered. "You got to jis'
+lay quiet. I'se had a terrible time aworryin' an' anursin' you an' I
+ain't goin' to risk youah getting sick on my hands again through youah
+foolishness. Golly, I doan know what you white chilluns would do widout
+dis nigger to watch out foah you-alls."
+
+So much was Walter improved, that Charley thought it safe to tell him
+of all that had happened since his accident.
+
+"I am almost glad the nets are gone," he declared, when Charley had
+finished. "I don't believe I would ever have made a good net fisherman.
+I could never have grown to like the work."
+
+Chris' joy was almost pathetic to see. "I'se sho' going wid you-alls,"
+he cried. "Dis nigger can sho' catch fish with a hook. An' I sho' is
+glad I doan hab to stay alone on dis ole creepy island at night, no
+more."
+
+And, indeed, perhaps, the part the little negro had so far taken had
+been as hard and unpleasant as any of theirs.
+
+The evening that followed was by far the pleasantest they had spent on
+the island. Fear of the fishermen was over for the present at least.
+Walter's recovery was another cause for rejoicing, and they all looked
+forward to their morrow's work with a pleasurable anticipation that
+none had felt for the hard, nasty, trying net fishing.
+
+So eager was Chris to begin, that he was up long before daybreak
+cooking breakfast and putting up a hearty lunch for their dinner.
+
+The sun was just coming up as they steered out of the inlet into the
+open gulf. Walter had insisted upon coming with them and lay on one
+of the seats looking somewhat thin and pale but drawing in increased
+strength from every breath of the bracing, salt air.
+
+The captain was in full command, for, when it was a matter of sea work,
+Charley quickly gave way to the old, experienced sailor. While they
+bounded over the blue sparkling waves for the line of coral reefs he
+brought out the hooks, lines, and heavy sinkers they had purchased and
+rigged up the tackle for their fishing. It was simple. Just strong
+braided lines fifty feet long with a heavy lead on one end. Above the
+lead, he attached three very short lines a couple of feet apart, tying
+a hook on each.
+
+As soon as he decided that they were nearing the reef he ordered the
+engine slowed down and cast a line over the stern.
+
+"It's too deep to see when we get on the reef," he explained, "so we
+will have to feel for it. That lead on the line pulls along smooth
+over the sandy bottom but when it strikes the coral lumps on the reef
+it will begin to jerk." He sat with hand on the line until a series of
+quick, jumping tremors told him they were over the reef when he ordered
+the anchor lowered.
+
+With eagerness the little party baited the hooks and cast their lines
+over. They waited breathless for the tugging which would announce a
+bite, but as the minutes dragged away without a nibble, their high
+spirits began to lower.
+
+"Golly, I could do better than this on the island," grumbled Chris, as
+he pulled up his line and examined his bait for the twentieth time.
+
+The old sailor filled and lit his pipe with a twinkle in his eye. "Wait
+jist one half hour an' they'll begin to bite," he announced, calmly.
+
+"Have you made special arrangements with them," Walter inquired.
+
+"Not quite, but fish have their habits the same as people," the captain
+explained. "They only bite at certain tides. Seems like they had their
+regular mealtime as one might say, only they go by tides instead of a
+clock. It's the last of the ebb tide now. In a few minutes it will be
+flood tide and the fish will all be hunting their breakfasts."
+
+"But I have caught fish on both ebb and flood tides, captain," Charley
+objected.
+
+"Yes, an' there are people, too, who are always eating between meals,"
+the old sailor retorted, "but most of them are contented with their
+regular mealtime."
+
+"Golly! dis nigger often wonders how you keeps track ob dem tides,"
+Chris remarked. "I can't tell nothin' 'bout dem, 'cept when I'se on de
+shore an' can watch the rise and fall."
+
+"It's simple, lad," explained the old sailor. "It's the moon that
+causes the tides. All one has to do is to notice the moon. When the
+moon is coming up the tide is going down. When the moon is going down
+the tide is coming up. No matter where you are it is always the same."
+
+"I've got a bite," Charley announced, and moon and tides were
+straightway forgotten by the eager little party.
+
+It seemed as though his announcement had been the breakfast bell for
+the finny creatures below, for before he had got his fish to the
+surface, his companions were hauling furiously on the lines.
+
+Charley gave a shout of exultation as he swung his prize aboard. It was
+a chunky, reddish fish with mouth and fins of scarlet, and was about
+fifteen pounds in weight.
+
+"That's a red grouper," said the captain, sparing a glance from his own
+captive. "This one I've got is a black grouper. Those flat, silvery
+fish Chris and Walter have caught are red-mouth grunts." But the old
+sailor had no time for further speculations for the sport grew fast and
+furious. Often they pulled up to find three fish on their line at once,
+one on each hook.
+
+As fast as they unhooked their captives they threw them into the
+forward cockpit where they soon grew into a beautiful, glistening heap
+of red, gold and silver hues.
+
+For two hours they pulled the fish aboard as fast as they could bait
+and cast their hooks. Then, as suddenly as they had begun, the fish
+ceased to bite.
+
+"We might as well get up anchor and move to another place," the captain
+announced.
+
+"Has we done catched dem all?" Chris inquired, innocently.
+
+"Hardly," said the old sailor, with a laugh, "but a shark or some other
+sea monster is prowling around down below and has scared them all
+away." They weighed anchor and drifted back a couple of hundred feet
+upon the reef where they found the fish biting there the same as before.
+
+"I'ze got something queer on my line," announced Chris, as he pulled up
+hand over hand. "Hit don't jerk none. Hit's jest heavy-like."
+
+"A bit of coral, I expect," Charley suggested.
+
+All stared at the curious-looking object as Chris slung it in over the
+side.
+
+"Why," said Charley, as he scraped off the clinging moss and barnacles.
+"It's a doll, just a big, rag doll."
+
+"Put it back in the water, lad," said the captain, with a hint of tears
+in his voice, "put it back. Likely its little mistress sleeps there
+below the waves. We must not separate her from her dolly."
+
+It was only a guess, but the idea took such strong hold of them all
+that anchor was again weighed and they dropped further along to another
+place.
+
+About four o'clock the captain declared it was time to start for home.
+
+"We have done pretty well for one day," he said, "and we have got to
+get home in time to carry the fish over to Clearwater."
+
+His companions were willing to stop. Although they had enjoyed the
+sport greatly, their arms were aching from the constant pulling and
+their hands were sore from numerous pricks from hooks and fins.
+
+An hour's run brought them back to their island. Here Chris stopped off
+to get supper, and Walt to lie down and rest a bit, while Charley and
+the captain carried the fish over.
+
+The two were back by the time Chris had supper ready.
+
+"We had twelve hundred pounds of grouper and six hundred pounds of
+grunts, twenty dollars' worth in all," Charley announced, proudly. "Not
+bad for our first day's work."
+
+"Why, that's five dollars apiece," said Walter, delightedly. "If we can
+keep that up we'll make thirty dollars a week for each one of us."
+
+"We can't figure on steady fishing," objected the captain. "That's the
+worst drawback about this reef fishing. One can only get out in fine
+weather. Sometimes it blows for a week at a time so that one cannot wet
+a line."
+
+"Then it's up to us to discover something to make money at during
+stormy weather," Charley declared.
+
+It was Chris who hit upon the idea, but the reader will learn about
+that later.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+HAPPY DAYS.
+
+
+FOR a week the weather held fair and each day found our little party,
+out on the reef, fishing with might and main to make as much money as
+possible before Hunter returned to his old haunts and tricks. They were
+thoroughly agreed that they would leave the island when he came back.
+They were not so much afraid for themselves but they had suffered heavy
+losses already from his rascality and they did not care to run the risk
+of being put still deeper in debt.
+
+Meanwhile, they were contented and happy in their new pursuit. They
+were long, happy days that they spent on the reef with the sparkling
+blue water all around them. The bracing salt breezes giving zest to
+their appetites, and the ever-new, thrilling expectancy with which
+they pulled in their prizes, speculating always before it came to the
+surface its kind, and size.
+
+On Saturday night they figured up the credit slips they had been given
+at the fish house and found that they had made one hundred and twelve
+dollars during the week. On Saturday night, also, they received a
+bit of ill news which was good news for them. Bill Roberts heard it
+from the fishermen at Clearwater, and he hastened over to tell them.
+It was to the effect that Hunter, discharged from the hospital, was
+well enough to be about, had proceeded to fill up on bad liquor in
+celebration of his release, and, as a result, was back in the hospital
+for a couple of weeks' more treatment.
+
+"It's an ill wind that blows nobody any good," quoted Charley, when he
+heard the news. "That gives us a couple of weeks more to fish in peace.
+Now if the weather only holds fair we will be able to pay what we owe
+and have a little left over to take us to some other place."
+
+But the weather did not hold fair. Sunday morning found the wind
+blowing half a gale from the north-west and the seas rolling high
+outside. Monday morning it was still blowing with unabated vigor and
+the sky looked as though there was more to come.
+
+"It's going to last for several days," Captain Westfield declared,
+"then, likely, we will get another spell of fair weather."
+
+"Why couldn't it hold off for a couple of weeks longer," Walter
+grumbled. "Every day lost means a lot to us now."
+
+After breakfast, Chris made ready to start out to secure a change for
+their bill of fare. Having nothing else to do the others went with him.
+
+His first move was to secure a supply of the great stone crabs, whose
+claws, when roasted, they had found so delicious.
+
+These were to be found in great numbers on the long mud flats, out
+in the bay, when low tide left the flats exposed. The boys could see
+thousands of them as they waded out to the flats. They were feeding or
+basking in the sun, but at the hunters approach one and all scurried
+for their hiding places, deep, slanting holes in the soft mud. But
+Chris was prepared for such tactics. He had fixed for himself a long
+iron rod with a hook in the end which he would thrust far down into
+a hole and drag out its squirming, clawing occupant. Then, he would
+kill it with a stroke of the rod, break off the great claws, and drop
+them into the sack he carried. In a few minutes the little darkey had
+secured as many as they could use before they spoiled.
+
+The crabs were not the only inhabitants of the flats. Clams were there
+in plenty and in a short time they dug up all they desired. Then a trip
+was made to some partly submerged rocks and a goodly supply of big flat
+oysters secured.
+
+"Strange we never see any Clearwater boys over here getting these
+things when they are so plentiful," Walter commented, as they started
+back to the cabin.
+
+"Golly! I'se been studyin' on dat," Chris said. "'Pears to dis nigger
+dat we could make right smart ob money getting dese things an' selling
+dem to de folks ober in de town."
+
+"They would hardly buy anything that is so plentiful right close to
+their homes," Walter objected.
+
+"Oh, I don't know about that," said Charley, thoughtfully. "It's too
+hard work getting them for some people, I suppose. Others are too busy
+to take the time from their work, maybe. Likely, a lot more have no
+boats, and probably there are many who don't know how to get them.
+There may be something worth considering in Chris' proposal."
+
+"Let's try it," said Captain Westfield. "We don't stand to lose
+anything but our work."
+
+All went to work with a will and in a couple of hours they had secured
+ten dozen crab claws, a couple of bushels of clams, and had opened up
+a couple of gallons of oysters. Chris and Charley took the lot over to
+Clearwater right after dinner.
+
+In an hour the two were back.
+
+"They sold like hot cakes," Charley declared. "We didn't get over a
+quarter of the town before we sold out. We got forty cents a dozen for
+crab claws, fifty cents a quart for the oysters, and ten cents a dozen
+for clams."
+
+"You robbers!" Walter gasped, in surprise, "they are not worth that."
+
+"A thing is worth what you can get for it," Charley grinned. "Besides,
+we had to throw in an extra charge for the service, like they do in an
+expensive restaurant when they charge you two dollars for a fifty cent
+steak."
+
+"Well, I reckon we can supply them with all they want at those prices,"
+the captain remarked, dryly. "Let's get to work."
+
+And work they did for the next three days, by which time the weather
+had cleared up, their market supplied for a time, and they, themselves,
+richer by about fifty dollars. Then they went back to their fishing
+again until the next spell of bad weather should come.
+
+Often, as their little launch lay bobbing at her anchor, on the reef,
+great stately ships swept by in plain sight, traveling north or south
+to various ports. The captain watched them with the eager interest of a
+boy. Almost his whole life had been spent on the sea, and he loved its
+ships like a mother loves her children.
+
+They were watching one of these ships one day wondering idly as to what
+might be her name, port, and cargo, when Charley's gaze became centered
+on a smaller craft some two miles astern of the first. Something about
+the cut and set of her sails caught and held his attention.
+
+"That boat is some traveler, Captain," he observed. "See how she is
+drawing up on the one ahead."
+
+The old sailor studied the distant craft with the eye of an expert.
+
+"She is going some," he admitted. "Fore and aft topsail schooner, about
+eighty tons' burden. Funny, there seems something familiar in the cut
+of those sails and the set of those spars."
+
+"That's what I was thinking," Charley agreed. "I'm almost certain I've
+seen that rig before."
+
+"See, she's changed her course and is standing in for shore," suddenly
+cried the observant old sailor.
+
+It soon became evident that he was right. The stranger came sweeping
+rapidly on carrying a wave of white froth before her bow.
+
+Her changed course would bring her within half a mile of where they
+lay, and, as she drew nearer, our little party ceased fishing and stood
+gazing in admiration at the beautiful picture she made.
+
+She was a low-hulled, black-painted schooner, keeling over under a
+press of snowy canvas, until her lee rail was buried in a smother of
+foam.
+
+"I believe she is headed right for our island," Charley observed.
+
+"If her captain does not know these waters pretty well he'll be liable
+to pile that beauty up on a rock," Captain Westfield said, anxiously.
+
+It soon become evident that her pilot knew his ground for the
+schooner's course was shifted again and again as her commander
+jockeyed her around hidden rocks and through winding channels.
+
+Soon her crew began to take in sail. One after another the snow-white
+sheets came in until stripped to mainsail and storm staysail she
+rounded up a mile from shore and hung motionless in the wind.
+
+A tiny blot of color appeared on her deck and crept slowly up her
+foremast. At the top it opened up, a fluttering red flag.
+
+"She's signalling," the captain exclaimed.
+
+"I have it," Charley cried. "She's that smuggling craft. Her captain is
+trying to get in touch with the Hunter gang. No wonder I thought I had
+seen her before."
+
+"I wasn't as lucky as you in getting a glimpse of her that night,"
+remarked the captain, "but I have seen that craft somewhere before. I
+wonder where it was."
+
+"That likeness to some boat I know struck me hard the night I saw her
+by the light of the flare, but I guess it's only a chance resemblance,"
+Charley said. "Well, if they are waiting to hear from Hunter, they have
+a long wait ahead of them."
+
+"I wonder how Hunter communicated with her before he was hurt," Walter
+pondered.
+
+"There's no mystery about that," his chum replied. "That's the simplest
+part of the affair. It only takes a couple of days to get a letter to
+Cuba. I expect she has more aguardiente aboard now. Likely he wrote to
+her captain for a fresh supply as soon as he discovered that the other
+was gone. He doubtless planned to have us off the island before it
+arrived but his trip to the hospital has upset all his plans."
+
+"They are bold to try to bring it in in broad daylight," observed the
+Captain.
+
+"Oh, I daresay, they wouldn't attempt to land it until after dark, and
+there's nothing in her appearance to excite suspicion. If any boat came
+near her they could quickly slip out a couple of miles further and defy
+capture. Uncle Sam's jurisdiction does not extend out more than four
+miles from shore."
+
+The beautiful schooner remained hove to all the afternoon and
+apparently waiting an answer to her signal, but, at last, her skipper,
+probably deciding that something was wrong, crowded on all sail and
+glided swiftly out to sea.
+
+When our little party started home the schooner was a mere, distant
+speck on the horizon.
+
+"This is the second trip she has made and landed nothing," Walter
+observed. "After such luck, I should not think they would try again."
+
+"Oh, Hunter will likely write them the reason for his not being on
+hand and arrange for another meeting," Charley said. "They probably
+make enough money out of the business to be able to stand a few
+disappointments."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+TREASURE TROVE.
+
+
+THE chums saw but little of their good friends, the Roberts, during
+these busy days. They were up and off to the reefs every morning at
+break of dawn and only returned in the evening in time to get their
+catch of fish over to Clearwater before dark. Once, Charley met Bill
+on the dock and learned that his nets had come and that he and his
+brothers were fishing every night with but poor success. The big, young
+fellows looked weary, worn and worried.
+
+"I don't know what's become of all the fish," he said, "we have been
+hunting over hundreds of miles of water and haven't found a decent
+school in a week. We need to make a few good catches, badly, too. All
+our money was in the bank which failed in Tampa the other day. We are
+almost broke, now, and the closed season, when we are not allowed to
+fish, is only a few weeks off. It looks like we are in for a long
+streak of hard luck."
+
+Charley expressed his sincere sympathy.
+
+"Oh, we'll not starve," Bill replied. "But it does hurt to have all
+the money you've worked hard for go like that without getting any good
+out of it. Well, I don't know why I am complaining to you, you have had
+worse troubles than ours."
+
+It was a different looking Bill who routed them out of bed before dawn
+a few mornings later. His eyes were shining with excitement and his
+simple, frank face was beaming.
+
+"Get on your clothes quick as you can and come with me," he cried.
+"We've got a chance to make a good pot of money."
+
+As they hurried into their clothing he explained.
+
+"There's a big schooner laden with lumber out about two miles in the
+gulf. She sprung a bad leak three days ago and her crew have worn
+themselves out at the pumps but the water is gaining on them all the
+time. If they can't get her into a dry dock within twenty-four hours,
+boat and cargo will be a total loss. We were passing her when her
+captain hailed us and asked for a tow. There is a dry dock at Tarpon
+Springs and he offers one thousand dollars to be towed up to it."
+
+"Whew," Charley whistled, "that's a nice bunch of money. Do you think
+we can manage it?"
+
+"Not alone, but I've been over to Clearwater and got three of the best
+fishermen there to help us with their launches. That makes five of us
+to divide the thousand dollars; two hundred dollars apiece. With luck,
+we ought to make the tow up in eight hours."
+
+His story had hastened the little party's movements and by the time he
+had finished they were all ready and eager for the start.
+
+They found the other three launches waiting impatiently for them at the
+dock and in a few minutes all five were under way standing out for the
+schooner which was in plain view from the inlet.
+
+"One thousand dollars seems an awful price to pay for a tow of eighteen
+miles," Charley observed, as the "Dixie" tore through the water
+leading the little fleet. "Do you suppose we will have any difficulty
+in getting the money, Captain? The owners might not back up their
+captain's agreement."
+
+"They will have to do it if we do our part," declared the old sailor,
+wise in the laws of the sea. "A captain is king of his ship. He can
+bind the owners for anything he considers necessary for the best
+interest of his ship or cargo. The only question is whether the owners
+are responsible persons. Likely, I can tell who the owners are when we
+get close enough to see her name. I know most of the ship-owners of
+these waters."
+
+He uttered an exclamation of satisfaction as they drew near enough to
+decipher the name "North Wind" on the bow of the unlucky ship. "She is
+owned by Curry Bros. of Key West," he announced. "They are a rich firm,
+made most of their money out of wrecking. They own dozens of ships.
+Our money is all right if we keep our side of the agreement."
+
+The unfortunate schooner lay low in the water, the waves almost
+breaking over her lumber-laden decks. She was barely moving in the
+light breeze. From every scupper hole gushed forth a stream of bright,
+clear, sea water as her crew labored at the clanking pumps.
+
+"Why, they are all negroes, even the captain," Charley exclaimed, as
+the "Dixie" swept closer.
+
+"Most of these Key West boats are manned by negroes," Captain Westfield
+said. "They are expert sailors and wreckers, and could give a regular
+lawyer points on ocean law, but they are mighty lazy. They get a share
+of what the ship earns instead of wages and one would think they would
+carry as small a crew as possible so as to get big shares, but instead
+of that, they carry double the men they need so as to make the work as
+light as possible. Don't seem to care whether they make anything or not
+so long as they have plenty to eat and little to do."
+
+The numerous, grinning, ebony faces and kinky, woolly heads on the
+leaking ship testified to the truth of the old sailor's assertion.
+
+The schooner's captain, a tall, lanky, solemn-visaged, old negro,
+wearing bone-rimmed spectacles, met them as they came alongside.
+
+He glanced at the five launches with evident satisfaction.
+
+"I reckon you-all white gentlemens can get me into Tarpon afore the ole
+gal sinks," he observed. "I figure we can keep her afloat ten hours
+longer if I can keep dem lazy niggers working de pumps."
+
+"She hadn't ought to sink even when she fills," Captain Westfield
+observed. "The lumber ought to keep her up."
+
+"Dar's a lot ob hardware in her, too," the negro captain declared.
+"Hit's stowed deep in de hold wid such a raffle ob lumber on top ob hit
+dat we can't get to hit widout throwing all de lumber overboard. She'll
+go down like a rock when she fills."
+
+"Then we don't want to waste any time talking," Captain Westfield
+declared. "Pass us your lines and we will fasten on. First, though,
+you had better repeat the proposal you made to this gentleman here,"
+indicating Bill Roberts. "If we tow you in, we don't want any
+misunderstanding about our pay after the job is done."
+
+The old negro spoke slowly, evidently considering his words carefully.
+
+"If you white gentlemens tow me in to de dry dock at Tarpon you is to
+get one thousand dollars for de job. You-alls can draw on Curry Bros.
+through de Tarpon bank jes' as soon as we gets to de dry dock."
+
+"All right," Captain Westfield agreed. "Pass us your lines and we'll
+get busy."
+
+In a few moments, the five launches were fast to the schooner and with
+engines throbbing were slowly dragging the helpless hulk towards her
+destination.
+
+The fishing launches were all good boats of their kind, but they had
+not been intended for such heavy work and the strain on their light
+engines was terrific.
+
+The two boys watched the "Dixie's" straining engine with the anxious
+care of a mother for her child as they dragged their big tow slowly
+ahead.
+
+"I guess it will last out the trip," Charley said, "but I wouldn't
+like to do much of this kind of work with it. It's like overloading a
+willing horse."
+
+At the end of the fifth mile, the launch ahead of them dropped out of
+the struggle with a broken piston ring.
+
+"Go on, don't stop for me!" its owner yelled with more unselfishness
+than they had expected. "I'll manage to limp her back to Clearwater.
+So long, and good luck to you. You will have to hit it up for all you
+are worth now or you won't make it. There's a squall making up in the
+north-west. If it strikes you before you get in behind Anchote Key, you
+will have to cut loose from the schooner."
+
+Captain Westfield had, for some time, been watching the small black
+cloud making up in the north-west.
+
+"It's going to be a close shave to make Tarpon before that thing hits
+us," he remarked to Charley. "We pulled slow enough when there were
+five of us and now with only four we are not making over two miles an
+hour. It's a wonder the engines stand the additional strain. I keep
+expecting them to break down."
+
+"It's not only that we are one less in number, which counts, but also
+the fact that the schooner keeps getting harder and harder to pull,"
+Charley observed. "I'll bet she is six inches deeper in the water than
+when we fastened on. Her captain is doing his best to keep her up--just
+listen to him," he grinned.
+
+The lanky, solemn, old negro was dancing around the schooner's deck
+heaping abuse, threats, prayers, and supplications on the kinky-headed
+toilers at the pumps. He also had noted the gathering squall and was
+driving his exhausted crew to the limit of their endurance.
+
+The minutes dragged slowly away while the launches with their heavy
+burden labored gallantly on. They were slowly nearing the island,
+Anchote Key, which lay in front of the port of Tarpon Springs. But,
+although they were close to their destination, the squall was close to
+them. The tiny black cloud had spread rapidly until it blanketed the
+entire northern horizon with an inky mass.
+
+"Do you think we will make it, Captain?" Charley inquired, anxiously,
+as they watched the gathering storm.
+
+"I doubt if we will reach Tarpon before it hits us," answered the old
+sailor, "but I guess we will be able to get in behind Anchote Key and
+escape the worst of the seas."
+
+As the squall neared them the wind dropped away and the sea took on an
+oily smoothness. The air hung heavy, still and oppressive. The sun had
+long since disappeared behind the wall of black but so motionless was
+the air that they breathed with difficulty and the perspiration stood
+out on their hands and faces.
+
+"There she comes," cried Captain Westfield, suddenly.
+
+Away to the north under the low-hanging cloud appeared a wall of
+foaming white.
+
+Charley steered with one eye on the moving comb of water and the other
+on the rock-shored island close aboard.
+
+He gave a sigh of relief as the launches and schooner slipped slowly in
+behind the protecting island just as the squall broke in a roar of wind
+and driving sheets of rain.
+
+His relief was short-lived, however. They had escaped the fury of the
+billows outside but it was rough enough behind the key and high seas
+tumbled and rolled around the boats.
+
+He glanced back to see how it fared with the schooner. What he saw made
+him leap for the straining tow line, whipping out his sheath-knife as
+he sprang. One stroke severed the taut rope, and, relieved of the drag,
+the "Dixie" leaped ahead like a frightened deer.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+SALVAGE HUNTERS.
+
+
+ON board the schooner all was excitement and confusion. Nearly awash
+as she already was the first big wave had swept her from stem to
+stern. Her frightened negro crew had quickly sprung into the rigging
+yelling at the top of their voices. Only the solemn, lanky, old captain
+remained impassive. He still stood at his post, by the wheel, peering
+over his big, horn-rimmed spectacles, sizing up the situation with
+shrewd, calculating eyes.
+
+A second wave struck and swept over, and then a third.
+
+"She's sinking," Walter shouted.
+
+Slowly the doomed craft settled down, down until her bulwarks lay even
+with the water, then stopped.
+
+"She is not going to sink," Charley exclaimed, as he saw her stop in
+her downward course.
+
+Captain Westfield quickly grasped the strange situation. "She's gone as
+far as she can," he declared. "She is resting on a shoal. Steer down on
+the leeward side of her, Charley, and we will take off the crew."
+
+The other launch captains had been on the watch and had cut loose at
+the same time as Charley. Following the "Dixie's" example, they flocked
+around to the lee side of the wreck and assisted to take off the crew.
+The rescued negroes came aboard, wet to the skin, and fright had given
+their ebony faces a peculiar, ashen hue.
+
+The solemn lanky captain was the last to leave the schooner. Before
+getting aboard the "Dixie," he made his way up to the vessel's bow and
+knocking out the shackle pin let the anchor drop to the bottom; a move
+which Captain Westfield watched with a twinkle in his eyes.
+
+"That darkey sure knows his business," he remarked in an undertone to
+Charley.
+
+The other launches crowded around the "Dixie," their captains wanting a
+consultation.
+
+"The schooner's not in bad shape here," Bill Roberts observed. "There
+isn't sea enough to break her up. The owners can get a sea tug and a
+steam pump from Tampa, and get her up and keep her afloat long enough
+to tow her into the dry dock."
+
+"We might as well all run on into Tarpon now and draw on Curry Bros.
+for that thousand dollars," one of the other captains proposed.
+
+"You-alls can't collect dat money now," observed the darkey skipper,
+calmly. "You-alls wasn't to get it 'less you got de schooner into de
+dry dock."
+
+"Didn't we do our best?" demanded Bill Roberts. "Haven't we got you
+nearly there? Haven't we got your vessel into a place where she will
+not be lost? Where would your old ship be outside in the gulf in this
+gale? She wouldn't have lasted out there as long as a snowball in the
+warm place."
+
+"Dat's all true," agreed the darkey captain, "but you ain't carried out
+youah part ob de contract. If you white gentlemens had got de schooner
+into de dry dock all right hit would hab been worth dat thousand
+dollars to mah owners, but now, dey will have to go to de expense ob a
+tug an' steam pump, an' dat's going to be a heap ob money. I'se got to
+watch out for my owners' interests."
+
+"But we have done our best," Captain Westfield protested. "We have
+spent our time and strained our engines, and we ought to be paid for
+what we've done."
+
+"Dat's all right," agreed the sable skipper. "I reckon Curry Bros. pay
+you for dat all right, but not dat thousand dollars. Dat's too much,
+under de circumstances."
+
+For a few minutes it looked as though the wily, ebony skipper would
+receive rough treatment from the infuriated launch captains, but the
+cooler arguments of the Roberts and Captain Westfield prevailed.
+
+"He has got the law on his side," Captain Westfield said. "We can't
+force the payment of that thousand dollars, although what we have done
+for the owners is worth many times the amount. I guess the best thing
+we can do is to trust to Curry Bros. to do the right thing by us."
+
+"Not for me," declared the captain of one launch. "If we can't collect
+that bill, I'll collect a bigger one. That schooner is abandoned. Her
+captain and crew have deserted her. I am going to put a man on her and
+put in a claim for salvage. The rest of you can join me, or not, just
+as you please."
+
+"I am with you," the other fish captains agreed. Bill Roberts wavered
+and glanced at Captain Westfield for advice.
+
+"I don't believe such a course would get us anything," the old sailor
+said. "These Key West captains are wise to all the salvage laws and
+Curry Bros. made their money in wrecking. They would fight any claim
+for salvage and they have got too much money for us to fight against."
+
+"Dis white gentleman is telling you-alls the truth," affirmed the
+darkey skipper. "Dat ship ain't abandoned. I'se jes' going ashore to
+communicate wid de owners. I'se dun dropped de anchor over. An' she
+ain't floating helpless at sea."
+
+"All right, you fellows can listen to that nigger if you want to," said
+the salvage hunter. "I'm going to take possession of the schooner. If
+you are going back, you can take these darkeys I've got in my launch."
+
+His fellow fishermen elected to stay with him but the Roberts boys
+decided to return with our party. The negroes in the other two boats
+were transferred to the "Dixie," and Bill Roberts' boat, and the two
+launches remaining made fast to the sunken schooner.
+
+As soon as the transfer was made the two returning boats headed back
+for Clearwater with their cargoes of ebony passengers.
+
+It was nearly dark when hungry, weary, and disappointed, our party and
+the Roberts arrived at the Clearwater dock. The rescued negroes at once
+scattered to seek food and shelter in the colored quarter of the town.
+Their captain, lanky and solemn as ever, departed to the telegraph
+office to communicate with his owners.
+
+"You white gentlemen ain't going to lose nothing for de way you-alls
+have done," he assured Captain Westfield, earnestly, before he left.
+"I'se only a captain an' I'se done got to do what I thinks is foah mah
+owners' interests. I allows, though, dat Curry Bros. going to treat you
+all right. I'se sorry dose other two white gentlemens is going to try
+to make trouble. I'se dun been wrecking foah Mr. Curry foah foaty years
+an' I knows all about de salvage laws. Dey ain't a ghost ob a show to
+get salvage out ob dat schooner."
+
+It was not until several days after that, however, that our friends
+verified the truth of the ebony skipper's statements.
+
+The first proof came with the return of the two launches which had
+fastened to the schooner. Their captains were weary and wrathful.
+They had hung by the schooner for two days. Then a tug and steam pump
+arrived from Tampa and on board the tug was a United States marshal
+who curtly ordered them away from the schooner. The schooner had then
+been raised and towed into the dry dock. The two captains had at once
+entered suit for salvage claims but what the outcome would be even
+their lawyers could, or would not, say.
+
+The second proof came in the form of a letter from Curry Bros.,
+thanking them for what they had done and inclosing a check for two
+hundred dollars. Much to their pleasure they found that the Roberts
+boys had received a similar letter and check.
+
+The night the check came Charley got out his note book and pencil and
+figured up their accounts and the result brought satisfaction to them
+all.
+
+The reef fishing had proved more profitable than they had dared hope,
+and for it they had credit slips on the fish house for two hundred and
+seventy-five dollars.
+
+The sale of crabs, claws, and oysters--the work of stormy days--had
+brought them in another hundred dollars in cash.
+
+Adding to this the two-hundred dollar check they had just received
+brought the total up to five hundred and seventy-five dollars.
+
+Deducting the two hundred dollars they owed for groceries and nets,
+left them the comfortable balance of three hundred and seventy-five
+dollars.
+
+"That's not half bad," Charley observed, "but I think now is the time
+for us to quit. It will not be long now before Hunter returns and I
+want to be away from here before he gets back. If he succeeded in
+working a few more of his sly tricks on us he might put us in the hole
+again."
+
+His companions were loath to leave such profitable work but they could
+clearly see the wisdom of his plan. So, after some discussion, they
+decided that the next day should see their last trip to the reef. Then
+they would take their departure for the East Coast and seek whatever
+work they could find.
+
+This settled, they retired to dream happily of new scenes and new
+adventures.
+
+Their sleep would have been less sound, perhaps, had they known
+that Hunter had already returned. Their dreams would have been less
+pleasant, if they had seen the silently propelled row boat creep into
+their little dock, a slinking figure groping around in the "Dixie,"
+and, after a few minutes, the ghostly row boat departed as silently as
+it had come.
+
+But they were happily unconscious of these things and slept soundly on
+to waken only at their accustomed hour at break of day.
+
+Sunrise found them on the reef fishing busily. But for some reason or
+other they did not meet with their accustomed success. Bites came
+only at long and irregular intervals. They shifted frequently to fresh
+places but with no better result.
+
+"I shouldn't wonder if there was a storm brewing," Captain Westfield
+said. "Creatures in the sea, as well as on the land, seem to have a
+weather instinct which tells them when a serious change of weather is
+coming. It looks bright all around, but it seems to me I can feel a
+kind of heaviness in the air that only comes before a storm."
+
+Noon came but the sky remained clear and uncloudy.
+
+"I guess you missed the weather, for once, Captain," Charley observed,
+"but I think we might as well start for home, anyway. It's our last day
+and we are not catching enough to pay us to stay out any longer."
+
+His companions were willing so the anchor was hauled aboard and the
+engine started up.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+THE ACCIDENT.
+
+
+BOTH Charley and Walter had by this time become quite familiar with
+their little engine and when trouble with it occurred, as it sometimes
+did, it generally took them but a short time to locate what was wrong
+and fix it.
+
+They had covered perhaps half the distance back to the inlet when the
+steady throb, throb of the engine changed suddenly to a whirling roar.
+Charley hastily threw the switch, shutting off the spark, and the big
+fly wheel instantly ceased its wild revolutions.
+
+"Something has come loose," he announced. "Hand me that wrench, Walt.
+The shaft must have come loose to make the engine turn up at that
+speed."
+
+His chum handed him the desired tool and the lad raised up the false
+flooring in the launch's bottom which hid the shaft from view.
+
+What he expected to find was that one of the screws which fastened the
+propeller shaft had come loose and needed tightening, but what he saw
+filled his face with dismay. Rising, he stepped back to the stern and
+peered over under the launch's counter.
+
+"Our propeller's gone," he announced, straightening up. "That leaves
+us in a pretty fix--five miles from shore. We'll have to take some of
+these bottom boards and paddle in, and it's going to be slow, hard
+work."
+
+"I wonder how it happened," said Walter, as he fell to work with a
+heavy board for a paddle.
+
+"It didn't happen. It was just done," his chum said, grimly. "Evidently
+our friend Hunter got home before we expected him. He must have done it
+last night when we were all asleep."
+
+"Are you sure?" inquired Captain Westfield.
+
+"As sure as a person can be who did not actually see it done. The shaft
+was sawn three-fourths in two. The cut part is bright, showing that it
+was done recently. It was a clever trick all right. You see, it would
+not give way immediately but would wear in two, gradually, where it was
+cut. I guess he was in hopes it would break with us out in a seaway
+where we couldn't do anything. Luckily, it's happened when it is calm
+and we are not such a great ways from shore."
+
+But although the distance to shore was not so very great, it did not
+take them long to realize that it was going to take them a long time to
+cover it. The launch was deep and heavy in the water and with their
+rude, heavy, ungainly paddles they could only force her forward very
+slowly.
+
+"It's going to be after dark when we reach the inlet," the captain
+said, anxiously. "I do not believe we are making over half a mile an
+hour."
+
+Indeed, they were not making as good progress as that, for when
+dark settled down upon the water, they were a full three miles from
+shore and their arms and backs were beginning aching with the steady
+strain of wielding the heavy boards. Soon after the sun set, the wind
+commenced to freshen and the launch began to bob and drift about in a
+way to discourage further effort.
+
+"It's no use trying any longer," Charley declared, at last. "We are not
+getting ahead any and are just wearing ourselves out for nothing."
+
+"We might as well put over the anchor and make up our minds to stay
+here all night," the captain agreed.
+
+Walter dropped over the anchor and let out all the cable. "There isn't
+any too much rope," he announced, doubtfully. "The water's deep here. I
+guess, though, it will hold all right if it does not blow any harder."
+
+So far there was nothing very alarming in the situation. The launch
+rode easily and high, shipping no water, and they knew that if it were
+not at their dock in the morning the Roberts boys would notice their
+absence and be out looking for them. They had a couple of jugs of fresh
+water aboard, and there was enough of their dinner remaining to make
+a substantial lunch. This Chris now brought out and all ate heartily,
+their appetites whetted by the hard work they had done.
+
+As soon as they had finished, Charley brought out a lot of old sacks
+they had in a locker and spread them out in the little cabin. "Early to
+bed, early to rise," he quoted cheerfully. "I guess we might as well
+turn in. There is nothing to sit up for."
+
+They were all tired enough to agree to this and they all laid down,
+side by side. The launch's high sides and little cabin protected them
+from the wind and they were quite comfortable. Walter and Chris were
+almost instantly asleep, and Charley was just on the verge of dropping
+off when a movement of the captain roused him. He raised up and looked
+around.
+
+The old sailor had arisen and was standing out in the cockpit gazing at
+the sky.
+
+The lad crept out softly and joined him.
+
+"What's the matter, Captain?" he inquired, anxiously.
+
+"I don't just like the feel of this weather," said the old sailor,
+uneasily. "The wind is freshening all the time although it's doing it
+so slowly one hardly notices it. I am afraid we are in for more than a
+cap full of wind."
+
+"I don't think so," Charley disagreed. "Why, the sky is as clear as a
+bell all around. There's not a sign of a cloud."
+
+"I hope you are right. It don't always take clouds to make a wind,
+though, lad. Some of the worst gales I ever saw came out of a clear
+sky."
+
+"If it comes on to blow hard we will not be able to hang at anchor,"
+Charley said, thoughtfully, impressed by the old sailor's uneasiness.
+
+"No, the anchor won't hold in this deep water," agreed the sailor.
+"Even if it did catch on a ledge of rock and keep from dragging, we
+would have to cut loose if the sea ran high. With one short cable it
+would help to pull our bows under."
+
+"What direction do you think will the gale come from, if it comes at
+all?" the lad inquired.
+
+"From the same quarter the wind's blowing now," the captain replied,
+promptly. "That's the only good feature about a clear gale, the wind
+never shifts or varies but blows steady from one point."
+
+"Let's see," said Charley, considering. "It's blowing from the
+north-west now. That would neither drive us ashore nor out to sea, but
+straight down the coast."
+
+"We might hit some of the capes or cays way down the coast if the
+launch lasted to drift that far," said the old sailor.
+
+"Well," said Charley, philosophically, "if it comes, it comes. If it
+doesn't, it doesn't. We can't do any good by sitting up worrying and
+watching for it, so I am going to turn in."
+
+He crept softly in and laid down by Walter and was soon fast asleep.
+
+He was suddenly wakened out of a sound slumber by being thrown against
+the launch's side with a force which knocked the breath from his body.
+He tried to rise to his feet but was flung violently to the other side.
+Then on hands and knees, like an infant, he crawled out of the little
+cabin.
+
+Once in the open, it took him but a second to grasp what had happened.
+
+The launch had parted her cable and was now rolling helplessly in the
+trough of the seas which were now running high. In the darkness, he
+could just distinguish the captain in the bow. With difficulty, owing
+to the violent lurching and plunging, he crept forward to his side.
+
+The old sailor was working frantically to rig up a sea anchor with
+which to bring the launch's bow up in the wind.
+
+"Get me some of those bottom boards, and tear up some of the lockers,
+too, if you can break them loose," he commanded. "We will need every
+stick we can get to hold her bows to the seas."
+
+The lad crept aft and soon returned with an armful of boards he had
+torn loose. Returning again for more, he met Walter and Chris, who,
+also rudely awakened from their slumber, had made their way out of the
+cabin. With their assistance, all the loose boards they could get were
+soon carried up to the captain who, as fast as they were brought, bound
+them firmly with rope into one solid bundle.
+
+"There ought to be more, but perhaps these will do," said the old
+sailor, as he fastened the last plank to its fellows.
+
+He pulled in the trailing end of the severed cable, and, making it fast
+to the bundle of planks, shoved them over the bow. Then all three crept
+back aft and anxiously awaited results.
+
+For some minutes, they feared that their labors had been in vain, then,
+slowly, the launch's bow swung around to meet the seas and she rose and
+fell easily without the sickening lurching from side to side.
+
+"All's well, so far," the captain announced, "but this is only the
+beginning. It has hardly commenced to blow yet. She can ride out these
+seas all right, but if this wind keeps on increasing, by morning there
+will be seas that are seas."
+
+The boys glanced around at the watery mountains tumbling about them and
+decided that they cared not to see any bigger.
+
+The wild plunging of the launch made sleep impossible and the four
+huddled together in the little cockpit wondering if day would find them
+alive or swallowed up by the hungry waters.
+
+As the hours crept slowly by, they could not doubt that the wind
+was steadily rising. The seas grew steadily in size and the launch's
+pitching became wilder and wilder. Accustomed as they all were to the
+sea, the violent plunging gave them a feeling of nausea closely akin to
+seasickness. To add to their discomfort, the madly plunging launch sent
+up showers of spray which the wind drove in upon them soaking them to
+the skin and stinging their faces like hail.
+
+"She would not float a minute if we were out in the open gulf," the
+captain observed. "As it is, we are drifting down the coast in between
+the reef and the shore and the reef breaks some of the force of the
+seas. A little shift of the wind and we would either be driven out over
+the reef or upon a rock shore."
+
+"Cheery prospect either way we look at it," Charley said, grimly.
+"Heads we win, tails we lose."
+
+No one was in any mood for further conversation. Wet, miserable,
+wretched and anxious, they huddled close together in the little cockpit
+and waited longingly for the coming of day.
+
+At last, a gray light spread over the rolling waters and grew brighter
+and brighter till finally the sun peeped slowly into view.
+
+It came up grandly in a blue sky unflecked by clouds, revealing a scene
+wilder than they had imagined in the blackness of the night.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+
+THE STORM.
+
+
+AS they gazed around them, our little party could not help but realize
+the peril of their situation. To the west, about a mile from the
+drifting launch, was the reef over which the mountainous waves were
+breaking in heaps of swirling foam. To the east of them some three
+miles distant was the shore. All they could see of it was its swaying
+palms for its beach was hidden by the foaming breakers. All around them
+rose mighty seas upon which the drifting launch reared and plunged.
+
+So far, they were drifting straight down the lane between the reef and
+shore, but a slight shift of wind, either way, would send them ashore
+to be beaten to death in the pounding surf or out on the reef to be
+smothered in the mighty seas.
+
+Even without a shift of wind, they were in a perilous position. The
+launch was doing nobly, but she had never been built for such work.
+A craft so small could not reasonably be expected to live in such a
+seaway. She rose gallantly to the sweeping combers, but even a novice
+could see her sea-riding limit had almost been reached. Should the
+waves continue to increase much in size, the little craft was doomed.
+
+"Oh, well," said Charley, with an attempt at cheerfulness, "we are not
+as bad off as we might be. While there's life there's hope. The wind
+may begin to go down any minute, and if it does we will soon be picked
+up. There are boats traveling this passage all the time. There's a
+sail, now."
+
+He pointed to where a tiny fleck of white showed in the distance as
+they rose on the summit of a wave.
+
+All gazed eagerly at the distant fleck of white. They knew that no boat
+could rescue them in such a sea, but it gave them a spark of comfort to
+know that they were not alone on the watery deep.
+
+The white speck grew with amazing rapidity. In a few minutes, they were
+able to see that it was a small schooner scudding before the gale under
+a close reefed foresail.
+
+It swept by them not two hundred yards away, so close that they could
+see the pipe in the mouth of the man at the wheel.
+
+They gazed longingly after it until lost to view. When it had
+disappeared in the distance they felt an intensified loneliness and
+helplessness steal over them.
+
+The only consolation in their wretched plight was the sun. It shone
+brightly down with a warmth grateful to their wet, chilled bodies.
+
+"How fast do you think we are drifting, Captain?" inquired Charley,
+breaking the silence that had fallen upon them.
+
+"Impossible to tell, exactly," returned the old sailor. "As a guess, I
+would say about five miles an hour."
+
+"And we have been drifting about six hours, that would make thirty
+miles," the lad calculated. "If I remember the charts right that brings
+us about off of Tampa. Do you recall how the coast lies below there,
+Captain?"
+
+"Not exactly," admitted the old sailor, "but I think it holds about the
+same direction. Of course, there are a good many capes running out into
+the gulf, but I don't think there is any of them long enough for us to
+pile up on, short of Cape Sable, and that's a couple of hundred miles
+away."
+
+"So far so good, then," Charley commented. "We are in no immediate
+danger of piling up on shore at any rate. Whew, but the salt spray
+has made me thirsty as a fish. Here goes to get a drink of water." He
+crawled cautiously forward to the locker where the jugs were stowed.
+
+"Both broken," he announced, after a glance inside. "I might have known
+it would happen with all the rolling and pitching about. Well, I guess
+we can manage to do without until the wind goes down."
+
+But before noon, they realized that the loss of their water was a
+serious blow. The salt spray and hot sun gave them a painful thirst.
+Their throats grew parched and dry, and they could barely swallow the
+remnants of food left from their supper. All attempt at conversation
+was given up and they sat huddled and silent in the little cockpit.
+
+And so the long, dreary day dragged away. Time and again boats drove
+past them, scudding before the gale, and once a large steamer passed
+them almost within hailing distance. But no attempt at rescue could be
+made in such a sea.
+
+Night found them still drifting almost too weak and weary to care what
+happened next.
+
+"I believe the wind is going down a little," Charley said, shortly
+after the sun had set.
+
+"It is," the old sailor agreed, "but I'm afraid it isn't going down
+fast enough to help us much. I noticed before dark that our sea anchor
+is going to pieces. If it once goes and we swing into the trough of the
+seas, we are goners."
+
+But the old sailor had done his work well and the sea anchor did not
+give way as he feared, instead, it held stoutly together while they
+drifted on into the night.
+
+As the hours crept slowly away it became evident, beyond a doubt, that
+the wind was steadily going down, and with it the sea, although the
+waves still ran dangerously high.
+
+They were beginning to gain fresh hope and courage even in their
+suffering condition when the unexpected happened.
+
+It was Walter that saw it first,--a dark wall rising high up in the
+darkness directly in their path. They could do nothing to avert the
+danger, only sit and stare dully at the looming mass. As they drove
+down upon it they saw that it was a forest of great trees rising,
+apparently, right out of the water.
+
+Swiftly the doomed launch drifted down on the submerged forest.
+
+When a hundred feet away the captain roused to action. "Here's a rope,"
+he cried. "Each of you grab hold of it and cling on for life."
+
+The words were barely out of his mouth, when the launch, rising on a
+big wave, came down with a crash and the next wave sweeping over her
+carried them off into the sea.
+
+Like drowning men catching at a straw, the four clung to the rope
+as the rushing comber swept them on with it. Bruised, battered, and
+breathless, it hurled them upon something hard.
+
+"Quick!" Charley cried, as he realized that they had been safely cast
+up into shoal water. "Quick! Up for the beach before the next comber!"
+
+His companions had not waited for the command, but were already
+scrambling ahead. A few strides carried them out of danger--but there
+was no beach. Everywhere great trees rose up out of water nearly to
+their knees. Even in the darkness, they could see that the towering
+giants were almost bare of limb, and from high up above the water great
+crooked roots grasped down for a hold on the bottom.
+
+Charley grasped one of the elbow-like roots and pulled himself up out
+of water. "Come on," he cried, "it's high and dry up here. These roots
+grow so close together one can almost lie down upon them."
+
+His companions climbed weakly up beside him, where they rested, panting
+to gain their breath.
+
+"Come on, we can make ourselves more comfortable than this," Charley
+said, when he had regained some of the wind that had been battered out
+of him.
+
+They followed him as he crept cautiously from root to root. When they
+got about fifty feet from shore, he stopped.
+
+"We had not better try to go any further," he said. "We're shut off
+from the wind all right. Now, for a good, long drink."
+
+He slipped off into the water and, stooping, lapped greedily.
+
+"Come on," he said, as he straightened up for breath, "drink all you
+want, it's sweet and fresh."
+
+Much to their delight, his companions found it true and they drank long
+and greedily of the sweet, cool fluid.
+
+"Now, for beds," Charley announced, cheerfully, when their thirst was
+at last satisfied. "Just reach up and break off branches and lay them
+across the roots, that will have to do for to-night."
+
+By standing on their tip-toes, they were able to reach some of the
+small boughs and by pulling down--broke them off without difficulty. In
+a short time they had gathered and placed enough to make a platform big
+enough to accommodate them all. Upon this they were glad to lie down
+and stretch their tired, aching limbs and bodies.
+
+"This beats the launch, anyway," Charley observed, cheerfully. "The
+trees shield us from the wind, our thirst is satisfied, and there is no
+spray to wet us. The air is so warm we ought to be able to get a little
+sleep without catching cold. I guess, we could all eat a pretty hearty
+meal right now but we will have to wait until morning to get that."
+
+"What is this strange floating forest," his chum inquired. "I never saw
+trees like these before."
+
+"They are quite common," Charley answered. "They are cypresses, and
+grow only on low, over-flooded ground."
+
+"Have you any idea where we are, lad?" asked the captain.
+
+"I fancy we are on the north-western edge of the great Everglade
+swamp," Charley replied. "It meets the gulf somewhere below Marco,
+about one hundred and twenty miles from Clearwater. But we can talk
+over these things in the morning. Now we had better get a little sleep
+if we can. We will need all the rest we can get, for to-morrow is
+going to be a hard day."
+
+Hard and uncomfortable as was the uneven platform, his companions were
+so exhausted that they were instantly asleep and their snores soon
+mingled with the hooting of multitudes of owls and the croaking of
+thousands of frogs.
+
+Charley lay awake a few minutes longer, his mind too full of worry and
+discouragement for instant sleep.
+
+Their plight was enough to daunt the stoutest heart. Their launch was
+gone, pounded to pieces on the hard sand, and all the money they had
+worked so hard to earn and save would have to go to make good the loss.
+They would, after all their labor, be left just as they had landed in
+Clearwater with nothing but the clothing on their backs. That is, if
+they lived to reach Clearwater again.
+
+His mind filled with these gloomy reflections, the lad at last dropped
+off to sleep.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.
+
+CASTAWAYS.
+
+
+THE sun was high in the sky when Charley awoke and aroused his
+companions who were still sleeping.
+
+"Too much to do to-day to sleep longer," he declared. "We have got to
+find something to eat, and then try to get out of this place. Let's try
+the water for food first, and see what we can find.
+
+"We don't want to stray away from each other or get out of hearing of
+the surf," he said, as they picked their way over the knee-like roots.
+"Out of sound of the sea, a man would lose himself in five minutes in
+this uncanny forest. It is too dense to tell directions by the sun and
+one would stand a good chance of wandering around until death overtook
+him. Only the Seminole Indians can find their way through this horrible
+jungle and they have known it for ages."
+
+This little talk had brought them down to the water and they were
+surprised at the change a few hours had made. The sea was beautifully
+calm. Only a few smooth, gentle rollers remained to tell of the past
+storm.
+
+Of the launch nothing remained but a few, broken, splintered planks
+drifted up against the trees.
+
+Our little party were too hungry, however, to waste time in idle
+regrets. They waded at once out into the water looking for crabs,
+oysters, clams, or anything to fill their aching stomachs.
+
+But their search was fruitless. Except for a few bits of water-logged
+limbs, the bottom was bare.
+
+"I was afraid we would find nothing," Charley said, when they at last
+gave up the search. "The water is too fresh here from the overflow from
+the Glades for shell-fish to grow. We will have to depend on the land
+for our food until we can get out of this place."
+
+They were turning to retrace their steps to the platform, when Charley
+spied a small box wedged in between two cypress knees. He pulled
+it out and with hands that trembled with excitement lifted up the
+close-fitting cover and gave an exclamation of delight. It was the
+little box which had contained the batteries used to run the launch.
+Its contents were perfectly dry. Constructed purposely to protect the
+cells from spray, it had floated safely in undamaged. Besides the four
+dry cells, it contained a few little odds and ends they had placed
+there at different times to keep safe and dry. There was a package
+of tobacco belonging to the captain, several fish-hooks, some salt
+and pepper mixed together in a little paper package, and a few other
+trifles of no particular value.
+
+Hugging the box to him like a precious treasure, the lad followed his
+companions back to the platform. There, he carefully wedged it in
+between a couple of roots so that it could not be overturned. He had
+just done this when a startled cry from Walter sent him hurrying to his
+side.
+
+He found his chum in the act of killing a huge snake upon which he had
+nearly stepped. It was a repulsive-looking creature, stumpy and bloated
+in appearance and nearly as big around as a man's leg.
+
+"It's a moccasin," Charley said. "We will have to watch out for them.
+I expect there are lots of them around here. There's enough poison in
+that fellow's sac to kill a full-grown elephant."
+
+"I don't know as it would be much worse to die of snake-bite than to
+die of hunger," Walter remarked, gloomily, "and there seems to be
+nothing fit to eat in this awful place."
+
+"There are few places in this world where man cannot find food to
+eat, if he uses his wits," his chum replied. "God has provided food,
+everywhere, but has left it to man's intelligence to discover and make
+use of it."
+
+"We have a hook and line, perhaps we could catch a fish," Captain
+Westfield suggested, hopefully.
+
+"No bait," Charley said, briefly.
+
+He sat plunged in thought while his companions looked around for
+something with which to bait the hook.
+
+"Here's plenty of bait," Walter called. "Here's a whole colony of
+frogs--big ones, too."
+
+Charley hurried to his side. His chum was peering under a great root
+where were sprawled several, big, long-legged frogs.
+
+"What idiots we are," Charley grinned, as he dispatched one with a
+stick. "These are more than bait. They are the finest kind of food.
+Why, their legs are worth a dollar a pound in the New York market. Here
+was plenty of food right to our hand and we did not have sense enough
+to know it. Why, they were advertizing themselves all night long by
+their croaking."
+
+The captain and Chris joined in the slaughter and in a short time forty
+frogs had fallen victims to the sticks.
+
+"We are not likely to starve right away," Charley remarked, as they cut
+off and removed the skin from the legs. "There are certainly plenty
+more where these came from."
+
+"But how is we goin' to cook 'em widout no fire? Massa Chas?" demanded
+Chris.
+
+Walter and the captain gazed at him in dismay. In their pleasure at
+the prospect of food they had never thought of the lack of fire. Their
+matches were spoiled and useless. They had no steel and flint. They
+did not even have a bit of glass with which to focus the rays of the
+sun.
+
+Charley viewed their dismayed faces with a twinkle in his eyes.
+
+"If you will take a couple of those frogs legs and see if you can catch
+some fish, Chris, I will see to the fire," he said.
+
+Selecting a great root that was slightly hollowed on top, he built up
+a little heap of dry twigs, moss, and bits of bark, of which the trees
+around them offered an unlimited supply. Then he brought out from its
+resting place the box of batteries. Holding the ends of the wires down
+in the little heap of tinder, he rubbed them together. Sparks flew out
+on the bark and moss as the wires contacted and in a few seconds the
+heap was aflame. It only remained to put a few dry sticks on the blaze
+and the fire was ready for the cooking. Small branches sharpened at the
+end served for spits and in a few minutes a score of frogs legs were
+roasting over the coals.
+
+The odor wafted on the air brought Chris hurrying from his fishing. His
+hunger had overcome his patience. He did not come quite empty-handed,
+however, but dragged along with him two slender-bodied, long-snouted
+fish fully four feet in length, covered with armor-like scales.
+
+"Dem things is all I could catch, Massa Chas," he said, ruefully. "I
+don't reckon dey's any good?"
+
+"Those are gars," Charley announced. "There are better-flavored fish,
+still, they are not to be despised. They will go well with the frogs
+legs for dinner."
+
+His method of cooking them was simple. He removed the entrails, washed
+them out carefully, and buried them amongst the coals. While the legs
+and gars were cooking, he dispatched Chris down to the shore again to
+find some bits of the yacht's planking to serve as plates. By the time
+the little darkey returned laden with bits of boards, the repast was
+ready. The gars were raked out on a plank, and their scale-armored skin
+stripped off, leaving the flesh white as snow, juicy and tender.
+
+The four attacked the savory fish and delicious frogs legs with the
+appetites of wolves for they had eaten nothing for a day and night.
+
+When they had finished, the world did not seem so dark and gloomy.
+Things had taken on a rosier tinge.
+
+"It is past noon already, I believe," Charley said, as they rested a
+bit on the little platform after their hearty meal. "I don't believe
+it will pay us to start out to-day. I think we had better wait until
+to-morrow and get back our strength a bit, for we have got a tough
+journey ahead of us."
+
+His companions quickly agreed, for they still felt weak from exposure,
+thirst, worry, and lack of food. This being settled, all busied
+themselves in making things more comfortable for the night, and in
+making what simple preparations they could for to-morrow's journey.
+
+More branches were gathered and their little platform enlarged. There
+was plenty of long, soft, Spanish moss growing on the branches above
+their heads. It was far out of their reach and they could only look at
+it longingly until Walter hit upon the expedient of throwing their rope
+up over a limb and shinning up it like a monkey. He flung down great
+bunches of the soft, hair-like stuff which the captain spread out on
+their platform, transposing it into a soft springy couch.
+
+While Walter and the captain were thus occupied, the other two busied
+themselves in securing and preparing a store of food for the journey.
+Fully fifty more frogs and three more gars were caught and roasted.
+
+Each of the little party wore a large bandanna handkerchief around
+their necks and these Charley collected, washed thoroughly, and spread
+out on a root to dry. They were the only things he could think of in
+which to carry the food they had prepared.
+
+It was dark when these preparations were completed, and they heaped
+fresh wood upon the fire and stretched out on their platform for a
+good night's rest once more.
+
+"I expect they think at Clearwater that we are all dead," said Charley,
+as they lay gazing into the glowing embers of their fire.
+
+"And Hunter is doubtless hugging himself with joy over the success of
+his trick," Walter added, grimly. "He didn't cause our death but he
+came very near it. I seldom wish any one ill, but he is one man I would
+like to see punished for the evil he has done."
+
+"He will be," the captain said, with certainty. "The Lord will attend
+to that. If not in this world, then in the world to come."
+
+"Well, he has succeeded in putting us back where we started," Charley
+remarked, "and he is left free to carry on his smuggling and liquor
+selling as he pleases."
+
+"Unless Chris' ghost scares him off," Walter said. "Have you ever
+formed any theory about it and about the doctor's mysterious visit,
+Charley?"
+
+"Not a theory," his chum replied. "They are just mysteries I cannot
+account for in any way. Of course the explanation is simple--if we only
+knew it--it always is in these mysteries."
+
+The soft couch and the cozy warmth of the fire soon caused conversation
+to lag and yawns take the place of speech.
+
+Before they composed themselves for slumber, however, the captain
+offered up a heartfelt prayer, thanking the Lord for their deliverance
+from danger, and asking for His watchful care to attend them ever.
+
+This simple act of devotion over, all sought the slumber their tired
+bodies craved.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.
+
+HOMEWARD BOUND.
+
+
+WALTER awoke just as dawn was lighting up the floating forest, and he
+immediately awakened his companions.
+
+Breakfast was made off the frog legs and gar fish and as soon as it was
+finished, they took up their journey for Clearwater.
+
+Charley took the lead, bearing the box with its precious batteries, and
+the others followed carrying the handkerchiefs of food.
+
+They soon found that it was going to be hard, slow traveling.
+They could only make slow progress picking their way between the
+dense-growing trees and over the slippery roots. Every few paces they
+would have to stop and listen to make sure from the sound of the sea,
+that they were traveling in the right direction. At noon when they
+stopped to eat lunch, they estimated that they had covered but three
+miles. But the slowness was not the worst feature of their march,
+every step had to be made with watchful care. Never in all their
+Florida experiences had they seen so many snakes. Many were harmless,
+brightly-colored, water snakes, which wriggled at their approach, but
+besides these, there were dozens of moccasins sunning themselves on the
+roots,--great, sullen, sluggish reptiles they were, many being as big
+around as a man's leg. They would not move from the places where they
+lay and our little party had to pick their way carefully around each,
+for to be bitten by one would mean a horrible, agonizing death. To add
+to their troubles, they were constantly slipping and falling on the
+slippery roots, bruising and hurting themselves.
+
+"I hope it isn't much further till we come to the end of these
+cypresses," Charley said, as they nibbled at their lunch. "This kind of
+going is dangerous. We are liable to break an arm or leg before we get
+out of here."
+
+"Massa Chas," Chris observed, "why don't we-alls take to de water? Hit
+would sho' be a heap easier an' we wouldn't be runnin' on dem pesky
+snakes all de time."
+
+"Somebody kick me," Charley cried, sheepishly. "Of all the big fools in
+this state, we are the biggest. Here we have been wearing ourselves out
+over these pesky roots when we might have been wading comfortably along
+in the edge of the surf."
+
+Until Chris had spoken, they had none of them thought of so simple a
+solution of their difficulty. Being on shore, it had been the natural
+thing for them to try to make their way on shore.
+
+No time was lost in following the little negro's suggestion. As already
+stated, there was no beach, the gulf meeting the forest, but the water
+along the edge of trees was not much over a foot in depth and the
+bottom was of hard sand. Their progress was now more rapid and free
+from the danger of snakes, but, much to their surprise, they found it
+much more tiring than the route over the roots. Only those who have
+tried walking in water for a distance, can realize the strain on the
+leg muscles.
+
+By the middle of the afternoon, they were thoroughly tired out and
+Charley called a halt.
+
+"We had better make camp," he said. "We don't want to wear ourselves
+out the first day, and besides, it will take us some time to build a
+platform and get ready for the night."
+
+Accordingly, they made their way back among the cypress and fell to
+work. A platform was built and well bedded with moss and a good fire
+started for the night.
+
+For their supper, they only swallowed a few mouthfuls of their
+provisions. Truth to tell, the fish and frogs legs were beginning to
+pall on their appetites.
+
+"I wish there was some game in this uncanny forest," Walter observed.
+"This stuff does not taste as good as it did. I believe, there is truth
+in that old statement that a man cannot eat a quail a day for thirty
+days."
+
+"This forest is alive with game," Charley declared. "It's here even
+if we don't see it. Of course, there are no deer or bear for they
+avoid these watery places, but there are plenty of coons, wild cats,
+panthers, possums, and such things. I'll bet, there are at least a
+dozen animals watching our camp-fire right now and puzzling over it.
+Oh, there's plenty of game. The difficulty is to get it without guns or
+traps. I have been studying how to get some of it, and I think I have
+got an idea that may work."
+
+It still lacked some time before dark, and Charley immediately began
+to carry out his idea. It was absurdly simple. Returning to the gulf's
+edge, a short search discovered several short, heavy pieces of timber
+drifted up among the trees. These they lugged back a ways from shore.
+Each timber was laid upon as flat a surface of roots as they could
+find. One end was then raised up a couple of feet and supported on a
+stick. To the stick they tied a couple of frogs legs and some of the
+bones from the gars.
+
+"It's rather a primitive method of trapping but it may work," Charley
+observed. "The idea is that the animal pulling away at the bait will
+dislodge the stick and be crushed by the falling timber. Many animals,
+though, are too cunning to be tempted under such a dangerous-looking
+log, and others are quick enough to dodge its fall."
+
+It was now nearly dark and our little party hurried back to their
+platform and fire for they had no desire to move about amongst the
+roots and snakes after night.
+
+They were sleeping soundly when a succession of ear-splitting shrieks
+roused them into frightened wakefulness. It sounded like a woman crying
+out in mortal agony, but they had heard the sound before in their
+travels and knew it for a panther's screams. The animal was evidently
+close to them and they hastened to throw fresh fuel upon the dwindling
+fire. As the flames shot up the screaming ceased and the crashing of
+boughs told them of the hurried departure of the midnight prowler. As
+soon as the sounds died away, they stretched out to sleep once more
+knowing that they were in no danger so close to the fire.
+
+Their first act on awakening in the morning was to look at the traps.
+They had set five altogether and every one had been sprung. The first
+two had caught nothing in their fall. Pinioned under the third, they
+found a large, fat possum, the fourth held a snarling coon by one leg,
+while the fifth and last, was empty but splattered with blood and hair.
+
+"Here's where Mr. Panther got himself a feed," Charley observed. "There
+was a coon, or possum under this log until he came along and made his
+supper. I'll bet, he's chuckling to himself right now over the easy
+meat."
+
+The coon and possum were skinned at once and roasted on sticks over the
+coals. None of them ate much of the coon--its meat tasted somewhat like
+young pork but was rather too fat and strong, in flavor. The possum,
+however, they found delicious, the meat being white, tender and sweet.
+
+As soon as they had eaten and tied up what remained in their
+handkerchiefs, they once more took up their journey.
+
+They traveled steadily all the morning but with no signs apparent of
+reaching the edge of the belt of cypress. As far as they could see
+ahead of them along the shore the forest continued in an unbroken line.
+
+Noon brought them to a serious obstacle, a broad, slow-flowing river of
+black, muddy water. They were all good swimmers and could have easily
+swam the half mile which separated them from the other shore, but the
+sight of several large, floating, log-like objects made them hesitate
+to attempt it.
+
+"Those are either alligators or crocodiles," Charley said. "We had
+better make sure which they are before we venture in. Alligators are
+cowardly creatures, and will seldom attack a man, but crocodiles are
+not to be trifled with."
+
+It was some time before one of the floating monsters came near enough
+to reveal its character but when it did they were glad they had
+waited. It was a vicious, scaly-looking crocodile, fully fifteen feet
+in length.
+
+"Hard luck," commented Charley in disgust. "That means we will have to
+follow this bank up until we can find a place we can cross and then
+follow the other bank back to the gulf again. It may be only a few
+miles or it may be a hundred. It may take us a day or it may take us a
+week."
+
+"I wonder what river this is?" Walter said. "If we only knew, we could
+tell where we are."
+
+"It's impossible to say for certain," his chum replied. "There are
+a lot of big rivers emptying into the gulf. I am inclined to think,
+however, that this is the Snake River. It fits the description I've
+heard of the Snake. Well, let's have dinner and then we'll start to
+follow it up."
+
+A fire was lit and while it was getting under way, Walter succeeded in
+catching a leather-back turtle of which there were numbers basking on
+logs. This they cooked by the simple expedient of burying it in the
+coals and letting it roast in its own shell.
+
+Ordinarily they would have relished its delicate flavor, but they were
+beginning to tire of an all-meat diet. They were beginning to crave
+vegetables, bread, coffee, and the other varieties of food that make up
+civilized meals.
+
+They were munching the last of their frugal repast when they sprang to
+their feet in amazed surprise.
+
+"Good morning," said a voice right behind them.
+
+Standing but a few feet away was a splendid-looking Indian lad, leaning
+gracefully upon a long-barreled rifle. "Good morning," said the young
+Seminole again, smiling at their surprise.
+
+"Good morning," stammered Charley, in reply. "Who are you? Where did
+you come from? Where are we?"
+
+The Seminole's smile widened at the volley of questions.
+
+"My name is Willie John," he said in perfect English. "I come from the
+Big Cypress Swamp. Some of my people are camped there, hunting. You now
+are at the Snake River. It is about fifty miles from Tampa. Are you
+lost?"
+
+"Yes," replied Walter, recovering from his surprise. "We are, or rather
+were, both shipwrecked and lost. We had begun to think that we were the
+only people in the world. That's why your voice surprised us so."
+
+"I see," said the Indian lad, with his pleasant smile. "Perhaps it will
+be very pleasant to help you a little."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.
+
+THE CHUMS HAVE TWO CALLERS.
+
+
+"PERHAPS you can tell us how far we will have to go up this river
+before we find a place where we can cross?" Charley said.
+
+"I can do better than that. I can take you across. I have a canoe but a
+little ways from here," replied the Indian lad.
+
+"Good," exclaimed Walter, with pleasure. "That will help us out a lot.
+We were dreading the trip around."
+
+"We can cross as soon as you wish," offered the young Seminole.
+
+"Let's sit a while and rest," suggested Charley, whose curiosity was
+aroused by the manner and speech of the splendid young savage. "Are
+there many of your people camped at the Big Cypress?"
+
+"About one hundred. The Seminoles are becoming as the leaves in
+autumn," said the lad, sadly. "There are only four tribes of us left.
+One is camped at Fort Lauderdale, one at Indiantown, another tribe is
+hunting in the Glades, and we are at the Big Cypress. Only four hundred
+left of a once powerful race." His voice and face took on a deeper
+tinge of melancholy as he said, "Soon we will all be gone and only be a
+memory growing dim with the passing years."
+
+"Oh, I guess, it's not as bad as that," said Charley, cheerfully. "The
+Seminoles will gradually adjust themselves to civilization and begin to
+increase once more."
+
+"We are a homeless people," declared the lad. "Your race took all,
+except this swamp. Here we have lived at peace where no white man would
+live and now even it is being taken from us. Every week from the East
+Coast, great canals, like rivers, creep further and further into the
+swamp. And as fast as they creep in follow the whites with ploughs and
+teams. Houses spring up over night. The forest and deer vanish, and
+green fields take their place. Soon the great swamp will be no more."
+
+"But surely that is good," Charley argued. "It is the onward march of
+civilization."
+
+"Civilization," echoed the Indian, bitterly. "Will civilization make my
+people better? They are truthful, they are honest, they are cleanly in
+mind and body. Will civilization make them better?"
+
+Charley was silenced. Apart from education, he knew the Seminoles were
+the superior of his own race in morals.
+
+"No, civilization will not improve us, but it is coming to us. Nothing
+can stop it. The white man rejoices at its advance, the red man is sad
+and troubled. The great writer Kipling says,--
+
+ 'The toad beneath the harrow knows
+ Exactly where each tooth point goes,
+ The butterfly beside the road,
+ Preaches contentment to the toad.'"
+
+Our little party marveled at this strange youth, a savage, yet
+educated, gentle mannered, and of a wisdom far beyond his years.
+
+In reply to their questions, they learned that a noble white man, Dr.
+Fish, was spending his life in the heart of the Everglades, striving
+with all his might to do something for its unfortunate and deserving
+people. Amongst other things, he was educating the younger members of
+the tribe and trying to fit them for the inevitable struggle under the
+new order of things. They learned that their new friend was one of his
+pupils. That the lad was hunting for skins that he might earn the money
+necessary to go to college and fit himself to help his race in their
+distress.
+
+Our little party were filled with admiration for the noble youth's
+lofty ambition. They reflected sadly that there were woefully few white
+boys fired by the same high ideals.
+
+They would have liked to have tarried and talked longer with the
+interesting lad, but the slanting sun warned them that they must be on
+their way.
+
+The young Seminole led the way to his canoe which proved to be a
+cranky, clumsy craft dug out of a big cypress tree. Used as they were
+to water crafts, they entered it with considerable doubt and care. As
+soon as they were safely aboard, the lad shoved off and with a long
+pole propelled the ungainly craft to the other side of the river.
+
+"Follow the gulf," he directed, as they bade him good-by. "You ought to
+be out of the forest by to-morrow night. You will meet more rivers, but
+they contain no crocodiles so you will be able to cross them without
+danger."
+
+He shook hands gravely with each at parting, repeating quaintly the
+words of a hymn the good missionary had doubtless taught him. As our
+little party once more took up their weary march, the familiar words so
+quaintly quoted by the solitary lad in the gloomy swamp kept thrumming
+through their thoughts.
+
+ "God be with you till we meet again,
+ By His counsel guide uphold you,
+ With His sheep securely fold you,
+ God be with you till we meet again."
+
+They tramped steadily the balance of the afternoon and at night made
+camp on the edge of another large river. Here they were fortunate
+enough in finding a large bed of big mussels or fresh-water oysters,
+upon which they made a delicious supper.
+
+Sunrise found them again on their way, eager to be out of the somber,
+gloomy forest. They had already spent three days in its gloomy depths
+and they were heartily sick of it and its crawling serpents. They
+paused but a few minutes at noon to rest a bit, and to eat a few of the
+mussels they had brought with them, then pushed on again.
+
+"I believe we are nearly out of this hateful forest," Charley said, as
+they waded along its edge. "It seems to me that the cypress are not
+quite so dense, and, I fancy, I can get a glimpse of some trees of a
+darker green ahead."
+
+An hour's more wading proved his guess correct. Palmettoes, satinwoods,
+bays, and even pines, began to be mingled with the cypress. The color
+of the water changed gradually from its fresh blackness to the salt
+tinge of greenish-blue, and, at last, they came to a stretch of sandy
+beach which they hailed with joy for their feet were getting tender and
+sore from the constant wading.
+
+Long before dark, they were clear of the dismal, floating forest and
+made camp on a high, sandy bluff by the side of a clear, purling
+little brook. Their supper was a feast; roasted buds of the cabbage
+palmettoes, black bass fresh from the creek, oysters, clams, crab
+claws, and for dessert, huckleberries which grew in profusion around
+them.
+
+When it was finished, they stretched out on the beds they had made of
+dry, fragrant sea moss before the glowing fire in more hopeful spirits
+than they had been in many days. They were lying thus chattering
+contentedly when they received an unexpected visitor. He came as
+silently as an Indian. They neither saw nor heard him until he stepped
+into the fire's glow. He was a man of about forty years of age, dressed
+in buckskin and was of rather engaging appearance. His name, he said,
+was Watson, and he was a hunter and trapper.
+
+From him they learned they were but a day's journey from Tampa, and
+that a good beach extended the whole distance.
+
+The stranger stayed for at least two hours. He seemed to take an almost
+childish interest in their account of their misadventures and took an
+interest, that was pathetic, in all they could tell him of the news of
+the world outside. Events which had occurred two and three years before
+seemed to be news to him. Yet he appeared an educated, brainy man.
+
+He stayed until the little party's yawns could not longer be
+suppressed, then departed as silently as he had come.
+
+"Whew," sighed Charley, when at last he was gone, "I would as soon
+entertain a rattlesnake as that man."
+
+"Why?" Walter said, in surprise. "I thought he seemed bright and
+pleasant."
+
+"Is it possible you have never heard of that man, Watson? I thought
+everyone in Florida knew of him."
+
+"I have never heard of him, either," said Captain Westfield. "Who is
+he? Tell us about him."
+
+"It's a horrible tale, yet pathetic, too, in a way," said the lad,
+thoughtfully. "From what I have often heard, we are now in what is
+sometimes called 'Murderer's Belt.' I have heard it referred to many,
+many times, but I had forgotten all about it until I heard that man's
+name. In this fringe of country bordering on the Everglades, it seems
+that there are some forty or fifty men hiding out. They are men wanted
+for serious crimes, murder in most cases, for nothing but the dread
+of being hung would induce men to lead the lives they are forced to
+live. They live solitary lives. The Indians will have nothing to do
+with them and they fear or mistrust each other too much to associate
+amongst themselves. Each one is as alone in the world as though he were
+in solitary confinement. They get their living with their traps and
+rifles. That's all they get out of life, just a living and freedom.
+An army could not capture one of them, except by surprise, for at the
+first alarm they plunge into the swamp where none but an Indian could
+follow them. I don't suppose that man Watson has even spoken to a human
+being in years until to-night. Only our apparent harmlessness induced
+him to seek speech with us, I believe. For Watson is the king murderer
+of the lot. He came to Florida some years ago from Georgia, with the
+law officers in close pursuit. It had been discovered up there that he
+was the author of a string of mysterious murders. Brutal, cold-blooded
+murders that had been going on for years. Some forty or forty-five
+years in all, I believe. The officers caught up with him at Tampa, but
+he killed two, wounded the third, and escaped into 'Murderer's belt.'
+With him was a young brother, who, so far as could be learned, had
+taken no part in his crimes, but the two seemed to stick together from
+mutual affection.
+
+"Contrary to the usual custom in 'Murderer's Belt,' the two did not
+play it alone together as they should have done, but met and made
+friends with a man by the name of Cox who was about as hardened a
+character as Watson. The three hung together for a while, but one day
+there was a little quarrel and Cox shot the boy through the heart. He
+intended to kill Watson also and thought he had done so but the bullet
+glanced off on a button and Watson recovered his senses after a while
+to find his brother dead and Cox gone. They are both now seeking each
+other in the 'Belt.' Watson will try to kill Cox at sight to avenge
+his brother, and Cox will try to kill Watson the first chance he gets
+to keep from being killed. Neither can appeal to the law for they are
+both outside the law. It's a case of man against man or rather murderer
+against murderer. Think of what their lives must be. Every hour, day
+and night, trying to kill or keep from being killed. Not seeing each
+other, but knowing every minute that the other is seeking him with
+murder in his heart, expecting death from behind every tree and bush."
+
+"Massa Chas," said Chris, with a shudder, "youse gibbin' me de creep.
+Please not dat kind ob talk an' let's go to sleep."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.
+
+AN IDLE DAY.
+
+
+MUCH to their disappointment, our little party were forced to remain
+where they were the next day. The long, continuous soaking in the
+brackish water had made their feet so tender that walking on the sand
+was very painful. They prepared as usual for the start but they had
+not gone more than a hundred yards when they gave up the attempt and
+returned to where they had camped.
+
+"It is just as well for us to lay by, a day, anyway," Charley observed
+in an attempt to force cheerfulness from their enforced detention.
+"Tampa is only a day away and we couldn't go into the city like we
+are. We would be arrested as tramps as soon as the police caught sight
+of us. Gee! but we are a tough-looking gang. Captain, you look like a
+typical 'Weary Willie.' All you need is a stick, a tomato can, and a
+handkerchief full of hand-outs to be a complete 'knight of the road.'"
+
+"You haven't got any room to make fun of my appearance," grinned the
+old sailor. "You look like a cross between a coal heaver and a chimney
+sweep and Walter looks just as bad. It don't show up quite as bad on
+Chris."
+
+"Dat's de advantage ob bein' a nigger," agreed Chris, composedly. "A
+nigger can't show de dirt much. If I was one ob you white chillens I'd
+be plum ashamed ob myself--I sho' would."
+
+And indeed, the little party was a sight to behold. Their clothes were
+stiff from mud, slime, and brine, and their skins were grimed from the
+smoke of their camp-fires. They had washed thoroughly, and often, but
+the mud and slime of the swamp had made useless all efforts to keep
+clean.
+
+"First, we had better take a good wash ourselves and scrub good and
+clean with this white sand. Then wash out our clothes as good as we
+can. This warm sun will soon dry them out and keep us from catching
+cold. While they are drying, we can be getting something to eat for the
+day and fix up our feet. When that's all done we want to lay quiet the
+balance of the day and give our feet a chance to get into shape," said
+Charlie.
+
+Without soap, the washing of their clothes was a slow, laborious
+job. Luckily their clothing was comparatively new and strong or it
+would never have stood the rubbing and pounding it received. At last,
+however, the operation was completed and their pants and shirts were
+spread on the bushes to dry. This done, they turned their attention
+to the laying in of a supply of food for the day. While Chris, with
+the fish-line, sought a likely looking pool near the creek's mouth,
+Walter and Charley hunted for oysters and clams, and the captain busied
+himself in picking a generous supply of huckleberries. In a short time,
+the two boys had collected enough shell-fish for a couple of days, and
+joined the old sailor in picking the black, glossy berries. By the time
+they had gathered all that were wanted, Chris had succeeded in landing
+three big sea bass and a small shark about four feet in length.
+
+"Hold on, don't do that," Charley exclaimed, as the little darkey was
+casting the shark back into the water. "That shark is the very thing we
+want. I would not take a dollar for it."
+
+"Hit ain't no good to eat," protested Chris. "Hit tastes so strong
+you'd have hard work to swallow one bit of hit."
+
+"I'll show you what I want it for," Charley said. "Just start up a
+little fire while the rest of us open up some clams and oysters for
+dinner."
+
+When the fire was going briskly, the lad attacked the shark with his
+sheath-knife. Splitting it open, he cut out the fat and the liver from
+inside. These he placed in a big shell obtained from the beach and set
+the shell on the coals.
+
+"Now get some nice, clean, Spanish moss," he directed, "and unravel
+a yard or so of that rope we brought with us. There's nothing better
+than shark oil for a liniment. It is going to do our feet a world of
+good."
+
+As soon as the oil was tried out in the shell, they rubbed it on to
+their swollen feet. The result was immediate and gratifying. The
+burning ceased at once and the aching visibly decreased. When they had
+rubbed the oil well in, they wrapped their feet up in Spanish moss
+which they bound in place with bits of the raveled rope.
+
+"Now if we lay quiet and don't use them, they will be all right by
+to-morrow," declared Charley, with satisfaction. "I guess our clothes
+are dry by now. We had better put them on or this sun will have our
+backs blistered as sore as our feet."
+
+The boys hobbled over to where they had spread out their clothes and to
+their satisfaction found them perfectly dry.
+
+They were just slipping on their shirts when the captain descended upon
+them, wrath on his usually good-natured face.
+
+"What have you done with my clothes?" he demanded, angrily. "This is no
+time for joking. Stop it right now."
+
+"We haven't touched your clothes," Charley protested, indignantly.
+"They are just where you left them."
+
+"They ain't," gasped the old sailor, paling, for he knew the lad always
+told the truth. "They're gone. Someone has stolen them."
+
+"Whew," whistled Charley. "Some one of those murderers must have taken
+a fancy to them."
+
+"I'd murder him, if I could get my hands on him," cried the captain,
+wrathfully. "How am I going to go into town in this fix."
+
+Charley grinned as he caught the humor of the situation. "You could
+go into town all right," he said, "there wouldn't be any trouble
+about that. It's what they would do to you after you got into town. I
+don't really believe the police would stand for your present costume,
+Captain."
+
+The old sailor glared at him in helpless wrath. "What am I to do?" he
+mourned. "My back is burning already."
+
+"Sit down in the shade of that tree," Walter suggested, "the sun won't
+hit you there. We'll have to think up something for you. We would
+hardly care to enter the city with you in your present condition."
+
+Charley had quickly seized upon a plan to clothe the old sailor but he
+could not resist the temptation to tease him a little.
+
+"If we only had a barrel we could fix you out all right," he said,
+reflectively. "We could knock out the head and hang it from your neck
+by ropes."
+
+"But we haven't got the barrel," said Walter, regretfully, catching his
+chum's wink.
+
+The captain eyed them suspiciously but the two lads' faces were
+serious.
+
+Walter appealed to his chum, gravely. "He might pretend he is a work of
+art," he suggested, "he's got a ship tattooed on his back, a mermaid on
+his chest, and a flying fish on each leg. Maybe Tampa is an art-loving
+city and will receive him with open arms."
+
+"I am afraid not," Charley replied, gravely. "I expect it's just a big,
+rough, unartistic city. I think it would be better for him to enter as
+a nature-lover who had adopted the simple life."
+
+"Good," exclaimed his chum, enthusiastically. "Just the thing. What a
+sensation it will make. I can just see the papers with his picture on
+the front page and the black head lines.
+
+"Noted sea captain adopts the simple life and discards clothing. Says,
+'go naked and you'll live to be a hundred.'"
+
+"What's the name of that widow lady who was so interested in the
+captain, Mrs. Wick? I believe I'll send her one of the papers," said
+Charley, reflectively.
+
+This was more than the old sailor could stand. "If you young idiots
+can't suggest anything sensible, for the Lord Harry's sake shut up," he
+spluttered.
+
+"I don't see much we can suggest," Charley said seriously. "Our clothes
+are all too small for you or we would each give something to help dress
+you. There's no hope of getting your clothes back. The only thing I
+can think of, is to do you up in Spanish moss like they do roses and
+tender plants they send North."
+
+"I guess Spanish moss is the only thing," admitted the captain. "It
+ain't much, but it's better than nothing."
+
+So, with difficulty, restraining their laughter, the two lads proceeded
+to cover the old sailor with great bunches of the strong, long, Spanish
+moss, tying it securely to him with pieces of the raveled-out rope.
+
+When they had finished, he was a queer and wonderful creature.
+
+The sight was too much for Chris. The little darkey lay on the grass
+and rolled with laughter.
+
+"Massa Cap, Massa Cap," he gasped, "you look jes' like a great big
+Teddy Bear."
+
+The old sailor grinned feebly at the three, mirth-convulsed boys.
+
+"I reckon I do look some funny," he admitted, "but I don't care. It's
+comfortable, and a heap sight decenter than nothing."
+
+A look of anxiety came to his face and he winced visibly.
+
+"What's the matter?" asked Charley. "No pins sticking in you?"
+
+The captain scratched vigorously. "Thar's ants in that pesky moss,"
+he declared, at which announcement the three boys let out a roar of
+laughter that made the woods ring.
+
+It was verily a day of rest for the four wanderers. The balance of it
+was spent lying on their soft moss couches in the warm sunshine talking
+over past events and planning for the future.
+
+With the night came Watson again to sit in the shadows by their camp
+and listen greedily to what they could tell him of the world outside.
+In spite of the man's bloody record of crime, they could not help a
+touch of pity for his loneliness. And the truth was more indelibly
+stamped on their minds that evil brings its own punishment.
+
+They told him about the theft of the captain's clothes, and he listened
+attentively.
+
+"I guess it was Black Sam took them," he commented. "He was in rags the
+last glimpse I got of him. He certainly needs clothes but I guess you
+need them worse. I'll get them back for you."
+
+"Strangers," he said, as he rose to go, "I want you to do me a big
+favor. When you get outside send me a copy of the Atlanta Constitution.
+I ain't heard a thing of Georgia in years. Send it to Marco, care of
+Indian Charley, and I'll get it all right."
+
+Charley promised him they would do so.
+
+In the morning when they awoke, the captain's clothes were lying beside
+the fire.
+
+They never knew exactly how Watson made Black Sam relinquish his prize
+but there was a large blood-stain on the shoulder of the cleanly-washed
+shirt and they formed their own opinion.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX.
+
+THE DISCOVERY.
+
+
+THE day and night of rest, together with the shark oil, had worked
+wonders with the sore feet and, much to their delight, the little party
+found that they could travel once more without pain.
+
+After the weary days in the dismal swamp, they rejoiced in the new
+country they had entered. A broad, white sand beach made walking easy
+and their eyes were delighted with the ever-changing landscape. Soon
+they began to come upon signs of human habitation. Now a herd of cows
+grazing in placid contentment, and later, a little shack perched upon
+the beach and tenanted by a lone hermit of a fisherman. From him, they
+learned that they were within fifteen miles of the city of Tampa.
+
+The captain purchased a package of tobacco from the hermit and was soon
+enjoying the first smoke he had had in many days.
+
+The boys looked longingly at the fisherman's little sloop bobbing at
+anchor in the cove. They would have liked to have bargained for a
+passage to Tampa but they had too little money in their pockets to
+afford such a luxury.
+
+It was nearly noon and the fisherman, with the ready hospitality of his
+calling, invited them to dinner, an invitation they were not slow to
+accept.
+
+The meal was simple, but the vegetables tasted delicious after their
+steady meat diet, and they reveled in the strong, hot, fragrant coffee.
+
+They did not linger long after eating, for they were anxious to reach
+their journey's end.
+
+When about five miles from the friendly fisherman's, Charley called a
+halt.
+
+"Listen, and see if you hear anything," he said. "I've been hearing
+a queer noise for the last ten minutes but maybe it's only my
+imaginations."
+
+His companions stopped and listened.
+
+"No, it isn't your imagination," the captain declared. "I can hear it,
+too--a kind of peculiar noise I can't describe."
+
+"It sounds like the soft smacking of a thousand lips," Walter said. "I
+wonder what it is."
+
+"We will soon find out," Charley replied. "It seems to come from
+somewhere ahead."
+
+As they advanced, the peculiar noise became more distinct. It grew
+steadily in volume until at last they stood at what had once been the
+mouth of a creek, but which was now closed up, at the entrance, by a
+small mound of drifted sand, thus changing the former creek into a
+small lake.
+
+"My goodness! Look at it!" gasped Charley, weakly, pointing at the
+land-locked pond.
+
+"Jumping Moses," swore the captain, the nearest approach to an oath he
+ever permitted himself to use.
+
+The peculiar noise came from the lake's surface. It was literally
+covered with tiny, open, gaping mouths.
+
+"Mullet," Charley said, in a hushed voice, "mullet, thousands of them,
+tens of thousands of them, penned up in there like rats in a trap."
+
+"And we without a net or boat," lamented Walter, bitterly. "Just our
+luck."
+
+"Golly!" exclaimed Chris. "If we only had dese fish in Clearwater we
+wouldn't hab to worry 'bout money no more for awhile."
+
+"They must have got caught in here during that gale," Charley pondered.
+"The heavy sea drifted up the sand and closed up the entrance so they
+could not get out into the gulf again. They can't live a great while
+longer in that small body of water. That great number must have about
+all the oxygen in the water exhausted by now. Their coming to the
+surface to breathe proves that. They seldom do that surface breathing.
+Let's have a look at that pond and see what it's like."
+
+A hasty examination showed them that the lagoon was shallow, not more
+than three feet in the deepest places.
+
+"Just an ideal place to catch them," Charley declared.
+
+"Yes," agreed Walter, excitedly. "If we only had two or three nets we
+could tie them together and drag them across the pond like a seine."
+
+Charley shook his head, decidedly. "That bunch would tear your nets to
+shreds if you tried that plan. Why, boy, you don't comprehend how many
+fish there are in that school."
+
+"Well, I guess it's no use standing here looking at them any longer,"
+said Walter, morosely. "We can't do anything with them, so we might as
+well be moving on."
+
+"Yes, and moving fast too," Charley agreed, "but I have a hope that we
+can do something with those fish. They are worth trying for, anyway. It
+all depends on whether we can get to Clearwater and back again before
+they die, as they surely will as soon as all the air is gone from the
+water. Come on, let's hurry."
+
+As they hastened along at top speed, he explained his plan.
+
+"The first thing is to get to Clearwater," he declared. "Get the
+Roberts boys and their launch and nets, and all the other boats and
+nets we can get together, then come back here as quick as we can get
+back. Of course, we will have to divide up with the Roberts but they
+have been good friends of ours and deserve it. There's enough fish to
+pay all of us for the trouble if we find them still alive."
+
+"Go your fastest, lad," said the old sailor, briefly, "you'll find us
+right at your heels."
+
+And go fast Charley did. It called forth all the wind and strength of
+his three companions to keep up with him.
+
+Just as night was falling, four tired, draggled-looking persons entered
+the ticket office of the Atlantic Coast Line in Tampa.
+
+"When's the next train for Clearwater?" demanded one of the youths of
+the party, crisply.
+
+"Just gone," answered the agent, briefly. "No more until morning."
+
+"But we have got to get to Clearwater to-night," said the lad,
+desperately.
+
+The agent noted the look of dismay on the four faces. "The Northern
+flier is due here in half an hour," he said, slowly. "She slows down a
+bit for the curve. If it's a matter of life or death you might be able
+to board her. I would not advise it, though. She does not slack down
+much at Clearwater and it would be pretty risky jumping off."
+
+"Where's the best place to get on her?" asked the lad, briefly.
+
+"Right down by the water tank. It's risky, though."
+
+The lad thanked him, and the four hurried off for the water tank.
+
+They boarded the train safely and stood on the platform hanging on to
+the rails as the fast limited tore on in the darkness. They would
+have liked to have entered one of the coaches and rested on the
+cushioned seats but they were afraid the conductor would insist upon
+carrying them on to the next regular stop, a hundred miles beyond their
+destination.
+
+It was but an hour's ride to the little town and the flyer barely
+slackened speed as she thundered into it. As the lights of the station
+flashed into view, they stepped down to the lowest step and jumped.
+
+It was a fearful chance to take, but luck was with them. They landed
+in a bank of soft sand, and, although the breath was knocked out of
+them for a minute, they escaped unhurt except for Walter. He gained his
+feet, wincing with pain.
+
+"I've twisted my ankle," he said. "Don't stop for me. I would only be a
+hindrance to you with this game foot. Go on. I'll hunt up a doctor and
+have it tended to."
+
+Charley hesitated. "I don't like to leave you this way, old fellow," he
+said.
+
+"I don't like to be left, either," said his chum, grimly, "but you
+can't do me any good by staying. Go on. Don't waste precious time."
+
+Charley reluctantly obeyed.
+
+Walter stood gamely watching them with a smile on his face until the
+three were out of sight, then he hobbled for the main street, his face
+contorted with pain. His injury was far more serious than he had
+pretended. He was convinced that some bones in his foot were broken but
+he had concealed his plight from his chums for he knew they would not
+leave him if they thought his injury at all serious.
+
+Followed by the captain and Chris, Charley headed for the little
+station not far away. There were a few loungers on the platform and
+amongst them he was pleased to see one of the fish-boat captains who
+had helped in the towing of the "North Wind."
+
+"Is it you or your ghost?" he exclaimed, when Charley approached him.
+"Everyone thought you and your friends were lost in that gale."
+
+"If we are ghosts, we don't know it," Charley laughed. "Say, can we
+hire you and your launch for a couple of hours?"
+
+"You can," said the fish captain, promptly. "Fishing is so poor now I
+have quit it for a while. Where do you want to go?"
+
+"First over to the island where we used to stay, and then across to the
+Roberts camp, if they are at home."
+
+"Oh, you'll find them there all right. Fishing is so poor, now, it does
+not pay to go out."
+
+Charley pulled out a five-dollar bill, the only money he had in his
+pocket.
+
+"Here's your pay in advance," he said. "We may want to hire you for
+two or three days, but I'll let you know about that a little later.
+Just now, we are in a hurry. Can you take us right off?"
+
+"Right away," said the fisherman, pocketing the bill with satisfaction.
+"My launch is tied up to the dock. Come on if you are ready."
+
+In five minutes our little party was aboard the launch and headed for
+the island.
+
+"Reckon there ain't much use going there," the fisherman remarked, as
+they sped along. "Someone has torn the cabin down and broken the dock
+you built all to pieces."
+
+Charley smiled. Evidently Hunter had been doing all he could to
+discourage anyone else from occupying the island.
+
+"We don't intend to live there, any more," he said. "I just want to go
+ashore there for a minute."
+
+As the launch drew in close to the shore, he had him stop the engine
+and as soon as the keel touched bottom, he jumped overboard and waded
+ashore, carrying the launch's lantern.
+
+"Wait here for me. I'll be back in a minute," he directed.
+
+Once up near the cabin, he was not long in finding what he was after.
+He and his companions had taken in over a hundred dollars in cash from
+their sales of oysters and clams. It was too large a sum for them
+to risk carrying around in their pockets and they had not cared to
+leave it unguarded in the cabin while they were away fishing, so they
+had wisely put it in a glass jar and buried the jar in a safe place,
+keeping out only enough for pocket money.
+
+The lad found their little treasure undisturbed and stuffing it into
+his pockets he hurried back to the launch.
+
+"Now head over for the Roberts camp," he commanded, as soon as he
+climbed aboard.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI.
+
+THE FISH.
+
+
+"I HAVE rather a personal question to ask you, Captain Brown," Charley
+said, as the launch ploughed her way through the glowing water.
+
+"Let's hear it," said the fisherman.
+
+The lad hesitated. "It sounds rather impudent, but I want to know just
+how good a friend you are to Hunter and his gang?"
+
+"Can't say that I am a friend of his at all," answered the man,
+frankly. "There are quite a few of us fishermen who have no particular
+love for him, but we all try to avoid trouble with him because he can
+make things pretty costly for a man in a secret, underhand way which
+leaves one nothing to grasp upon. I suspect you have found that out for
+yourselves."
+
+"We have," admitted Charley, candidly. "It's a wonder to me, you
+fishermen, who do not like him, haven't got together and run him off
+before now."
+
+"I expect it does look kind of queer to an outsider," replied the man,
+reflectively. "But it's natural enough when one gets to understand
+fishermen. You seldom find a fisherman but who has been more or less
+of a roamer and adventurer. Their lives have made them self-reliant and
+taught them the rather hard lesson that it don't pay to take up others'
+quarrels. Unconsciously, perhaps, their motto is 'leave me alone and
+I'll leave you alone.' They may really be in sympathy with a man,
+but they seldom will assist him in his disputes. That trait in them
+explains why Hunter lasts so long. They simply will not combine against
+him."
+
+"I see," said Charley, thoughtfully, "that puts the matter in a new
+light to me. I had supposed they stood for Hunter and his ways because
+they approved of him and them."
+
+"Not at all," said the other, warmly. "Most of the fishermen are pretty
+good fellows at heart, but 'hands off' is their policy."
+
+"I am glad to learn that," Charley said, frankly. "I want to hire a
+few fishermen and their launches for a couple of days, but the work is
+rather important, and I want only men who will work for the interest
+of the man who pays them and not play into the hands of someone like
+Hunter."
+
+"The fishermen will be true to their employer's interests," declared
+the other, emphatically.
+
+"Good," said the lad. "I am going to trust to your judgment. As soon
+as you land us at Roberts' dock, I want you to go back to Clearwater
+and get four more launches with their skiffs and captains. Get the
+best and most trustworthy men you can pick out. If you can be back with
+them before midnight, it will mean five dollars extra for each of them
+and ten dollars extra for yourself. Bring plenty of gasoline for the
+launches, and provisions for two days for yourselves."
+
+"I can get the men and boats all right," Captain Brown said,
+doubtfully, "but they will want ten dollars apiece per day, and not
+knowing you, they will want some money down."
+
+Charley reached down into his pocket and pulled out the roll of bills
+at which the man gazed in amazement.
+
+"Here's the first day's pay for each in advance," he said, counting out
+fifty dollars, "and remember there is five dollars extra apiece in the
+job if they are all at the Roberts dock ready to start at midnight."
+
+"We'll all be ready in two hours," Captain Brown declared. "Here we are
+at the dock. I won't stop. Just jump out and give me a shove off. Time
+is worth money now," he grinned.
+
+The three jumped out on the little pier, shoved the launch off, and it
+was quickly lost in the darkness.
+
+Charley grinned as he stood for a moment listening to the rapid popping
+of the engine's exhaust.
+
+"He's got that engine turning up as fast as it will go," he commented.
+"He means to get that extra ten dollars, all right. Gee! but I've been
+using my nerve, spending money that belongs as much to the rest of you
+as it does to me."
+
+"That's all right," approved Captain Westfield. "You are planning out
+this thing. Spend the last penny if you want to. I believe in letting
+one at a time run a thing. Others butting in only gum things up--a ship
+don't work well under more than one captain."
+
+The light was still burning in the Roberts boys' cabin and a tap at the
+door brought forth an invitation to come in.
+
+When the three stepped into the lighted room they were greeted with
+exclamations of amazed pleasure.
+
+"It's good to see you all are safe again," cried the husky Bill, as he
+shook hands with a heartiness that made them wince. "We were mourning
+you as drowned. We did not believe your launch could have lasted out
+that gale."
+
+"She didn't," Captain Westfield said. "She went to pieces on shore a
+good many miles down the coast."
+
+"Tough luck," said the big fisherman, sympathetically. "You fellows do
+seem to hit it rough. It's too blamed bad, that's what it is."
+
+"I believe our luck is due to change pretty soon," Charley said, with a
+smile. "How are things coming with you now?"
+
+"Couldn't be much worse," Bill stated, briefly. "Goodness only knows
+what's become of all the fish. We haven't wet a net since the gale.
+What we lack of being stone-broke isn't much. We have only got about
+a hundred dollars in cash left but you are welcome to half of that. I
+guess you are worse off than we are."
+
+The three chums' hearts warmed with gratitude at the big fellow's
+generous offer.
+
+"We'll take the whole hundred, if you please," Charley said, calmly,
+"but not as a loan. We want you three as partners for a couple of days
+and the hundred will go to pay expenses. Can you give us a cup of
+coffee? We haven't had a bite to eat since noon."
+
+While the big fisherman rustled around fixing a lunch and making the
+coffee, Charley told of their discovery.
+
+"Whew, it sounds like finding money," Bill commented, when he had
+finished. "But we don't deserve any half share for just going with
+you and helping you out. Just pay us the same as you do the other
+fishermen."
+
+"No," Charley said, and his two chums nodded vigorous approval of his
+words. "It isn't what you are going to do but what you have already
+done that counts with us. You helped us out when we were friendless,
+and it is only just that you should share in our good fortune if we
+have any. But we must not count our chickens before they are hatched.
+The fish may be all dead by the time we get there, or someone else may
+have found them--they were making noise enough to be heard a mile.
+
+"Oh, we are making you no gift," he said, as Bill still protested
+against an equal division. "We may need your help and we need your
+money to pay off the launch men in case the trip is fruitless. It will
+take more cash than we've got. Besides, there may be some fighting."
+
+"Too bad we have got to have anyone in this but ourselves," Bill
+observed.
+
+"We have got to have help," Charley declared, "and, really, I do
+not fear any trouble from those who go with us. They are taking no
+nets with them, (I figured your three nets would be all we could use
+to advantage in such a small place). They have no idea as to our
+destination or what we are after. When they get there they will realize
+that it is too far away for them to come back, get their nets and
+return and do anything all tired out as they will be from the trip.
+Besides, I planned to offer them a bonus in money after we get there,
+provided they work good and hard."
+
+"You've got a long head on you," Bill said, admiringly. "You've
+evidently got it all planned out."
+
+"I tried to plan so far as I could," Charley said, modestly. "Where I
+fear trouble is when the fish begin to come into Clearwater. There will
+be a stampede of the other fishermen on us then. Put all your guns and
+ammunition in the launch. We may need them."
+
+While the three were eating, the Roberts packed up groceries and rolled
+up blankets for the trip. These, and the rifles, they carried down to
+the launch while the chums were finishing their coffee.
+
+They were ready none too soon, for as the chums drained their cups,
+they caught the mingled popping of the coming launches.
+
+It still lacked twenty minutes to midnight when the last launch came
+churning up to the end of the little dock.
+
+Charley counted out five dollars and handed it to each of the launch
+captains. "This is for being ahead of the time set. You'll each get
+your ten dollars apiece at the close of each day. Now, if you are all
+ready, we'll be off."
+
+"Where are we going, Boss?" questioned one of the captains.
+
+"I do not know the name of the place," the lad replied, thoughtfully.
+"Just follow our launch. We will lead the way."
+
+In a few minutes the things were all stowed aboard and Bill started
+up the engine. The launch leaped ahead and, with bow headed down the
+coast, sped away in the darkness closely followed by the other boats
+containing four contented, but thoroughly mystified, captains.
+
+As soon as they were fairly under way, our three chums stretched out on
+the launch's cushioned seats for a nap. They were completely worn out
+by the eventful day and night.
+
+At sunrise Charley was awakened by Bill.
+
+"We've been running without a hitch all night," the big fisherman
+informed him. "We must be getting near to your creek by now. We passed
+Tampa over an hour ago."
+
+Charley stood up and surveyed the shore-line. "I took a landmark before
+I left," he said. "There's a great, dead, pine tree standing up amongst
+a clump of palmettoes just to the south of the creek. I believe I can
+see it ahead there a couple of miles."
+
+At the end of ten minutes, he could make out the big, dead pine plainly.
+
+He awakened his chums and the three sat tense and impatient waiting to
+see if all their hopes and trouble had been in vain.
+
+When within a few hundred yards of the creek, Charley could stand the
+suspense no longer.
+
+"Stop the engine," he requested, in a fever of impatience.
+
+Bill threw off the battery switch. The four wondering captains trailing
+behind followed his example and the throbbing of the engines ceased.
+
+The lad stood up and listened intently. His quick ear could just
+distinguish a faint, peculiar noise, like the soft smacking of
+thousands of lips.
+
+He sank back into his seat with a sigh of relief.
+
+"It's all right," he exclaimed, delightedly. "I can hear them. Run in
+close to shore and anchor."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXII.
+
+ABOUT MANY THINGS.
+
+
+AS soon as the anchors were dropped all scrambled into the skiffs,
+eager to be ashore.
+
+They landed close to the sand spit that barred the creek's entrance,
+and a few steps brought them to where they could look in on the little
+inland lake. All stood silent for a moment, gazing at the thousands on
+thousands of little, open, gasping mouths.
+
+"I expected to see some fish from what you told us but I didn't expect
+anything like this," said Bill, drawing a deep breath. "Boy, there's a
+pot of money waiting for us in that little pond."
+
+The other fishermen's faces were expressive of amazement and envy.
+
+"You might have let us in on this," one of them grumbled.
+
+"Would any of you have done it for us if you had found them?" Charley
+demanded.
+
+"I wouldn't," the man admitted. "But, all the same, ten dollars a day
+looks mighty small with all this money in sight."
+
+"We need every dollar we can make off of this thing," the lad said,
+"but we want to be as generous as we can afford to be. We are going to
+do better by you than we bargained to do. If you all do your best to
+help us put these fish into Clearwater, we will give you ten per cent
+on what we make in addition to the ten dollars a day we promised you."
+
+"That's more than fair," declared Captain Brown. "We will do our best.
+All hands had better get to work at once. Those fish are about all in.
+I doubt if they will live thirty-six hours longer."
+
+Charley had planned everything on the way down the coast and he had
+already arranged each man's part so that the work might be done with
+system and despatch. The Roberts and himself were to do the work with
+the nets. The fishermen were to do the loading, with the captain to
+help them. All of them were to work on one launch at a time and as soon
+as it was loaded it was to start for Clearwater while the next one
+received its cargo.
+
+To Chris was assigned the job of cooking for all hands, so that no time
+would be lost in the preparation of meals.
+
+Charley and the Roberts had taken on themselves the hardest part of the
+work, but the four went at their nasty, disagreeable task with vigor
+and cheerfulness.
+
+Taking an end of the joined nets, they waded across one end of the
+shallow lagoon stringing it out behind them. As soon as they had
+gotten the end to the opposite shore, two got to each end and pulled
+lustily.
+
+They had been careful to cut off only a small portion of the lagoon,
+but even so, they found that the fish between the net and shore were
+almost more than they could handle. They had to pull with all their
+might to drag in the ladened net, and as they pulled, they feared each
+minute that the fine twine would give way under the tremendous pressure.
+
+But at last they got the net ashore, its meshes full of struggling,
+silvery mullet.
+
+Then began the tiring work of getting the fish out of the fine,
+tangling twine. As fast as they were taken out they tossed them into a
+large box, and as soon as the box was filled, a fisherman carried it to
+the waiting skiffs and dumped the load, returning for another.
+
+In two hours the first launch was loaded, and started back for
+Clearwater.
+
+Walter, his ankle done up in splints and bandages, and using a cane for
+a crutch, limped into the fish house, the day following his accident,
+and sought a seat on a pile of old nets in a corner where he was not
+likely to be seen by Mr. Daniels. He had not sought the kindly fish
+boss yet to tell him of the loss of the launch. He was deferring the
+unpleasant task in hopes that his chums would be successful when the
+telling would be easier. Besides, he was not feeling equal to the task
+of explaining. His foot pained him intensely. He was also depressed by
+the doctor's statement that he had suffered a compound fracture of the
+ankle and must not try to use his foot for many days to come. He had
+but little money in his pocket and had not dared spend any of it for
+board and lodging. Instead he had slept miserably in a skiff pulled up
+on shore and had breakfasted off of cheese and crackers. Taking it all
+in all he did not feel equal to the unpleasant task of breaking bad
+news. He had been drawn to the fish house, however, knowing that there
+he would be likely to hear the first news of his absent chums. He was
+hoping Mr. Daniels would, not spy him in his secluded corner.
+
+But Mr. Daniels was having troubles of his own. A dull season is hard
+on the fishermen but harder still on the fish boss. On the desk before
+him was a heap of letters and telegrams from customers demanding
+fish. If he could not supply them at once, they would of course buy
+elsewhere. Building up a trade is slow work, and if you cannot supply
+its wants, it is soon lost. He was worrying through the mass of mail
+when the telephone bell rang. He lifted the receiver off the hook.
+
+"Hello! who's this?" he demanded, curtly.
+
+"It's Captain Brown, Cap," answered a tired voice. "I'm at the dock.
+Send down for some fish, will you?"
+
+"How many have you got, twenty pounds?" demanded Mr. Daniels,
+sarcastically.
+
+"Call it twenty pounds if you like," drawled the tired voice. "I
+calculate, though, that they will come nearer tipping the scales at ten
+thousand pounds."
+
+"Good boy," exclaimed the fish boss in delight. "They will help me out
+a lot. Where did you catch them."
+
+"I didn't catch them," said the weary tones. "Credit them to the
+account of those new guys, 'West, Hazard and so forth.' Good-by, I've
+got to go back for another load."
+
+Walter in his secluded corner caught enough of the conversation
+to tell him that his chums had succeeded. He forgot his pain and
+discouragement. Things took on a rosy tinge. He suddenly remembered the
+dime's worth of cheese and crackers, for breakfast, had only put an
+edge on his appetite. He stole out of the fish house and hobbled down
+the street to a little restaurant where he was soon seated behind a
+big, juicy steak and mashed potatoes.
+
+As soon as his hunger was appeased, he hobbled back to the fish house.
+
+There he remained all the balance of the day and far into the night for
+the fish house was the scene of great excitement. One after the other
+the launches arrived with their finny cargoes. When the last one was
+unloaded the first to arrive was back again with another load. The
+house's regular force was unable to handle the deluge. Men, boys, and
+even women were hired at fancy prices to assist. Packing in barrels
+became impossible. As many as could be were packed that way but the
+most were hustled, unpacked, into a car and heavily iced down.
+
+"For goodness' sake, how many more are coming?" Mr. Daniels demanded of
+a midnight arrival.
+
+"Not many," answered the launch captain. "They were making their last
+haul when I left. Some of the fishermen followed the first launch back
+and are trying to butt into the snap."
+
+"The rascally scoundrels," exclaimed Mr. Daniels, indignantly.
+
+The man grinned wearily. "You needn't worry," he said. "When I left,
+Bill Roberts was standing off the gang with a rifle, while the other
+fellows got out the fish."
+
+"They must be about tired out by this time," commented the fish boss.
+
+"Tired!" exclaimed the launch captain. "I am pretty well worn out
+myself and we launch men have the easiest part of the job. Those
+fellows who are handling the nets are earning every dollar they will
+make. Their fingers are worn through both skins handling that fine, wet
+twine. Their hands are just bleeding raw, and you know how salt water
+and fish slimes smart the smallest cut. They have bent over the nets so
+long that they can't straighten up without bringing the tears to their
+eyes. I'd like to have the money they will make, but hanged if I would
+work that hard for it."
+
+The launch captain had not overstated the case. The little party on the
+beach below were very near the limit of human endurance when the last
+fish was taken out of the nets. The launch captain had to assist them
+to the skiffs and into the launches. Once aboard the motor boats, they
+stretched out on the seats and slept the sleep of utter exhaustion.
+
+Another day had dawned when the fish captain awoke them at Clearwater.
+
+Walter, radiant of countenance, was waiting on the dock to welcome them.
+
+It took Charley several minutes to regain his sleep-scattered wits.
+
+"How much did they weigh?" he asked eagerly, as he wrung his chum's
+hand in congratulation.
+
+"Just an even hundred and fifty thousand pounds," Walter said.
+
+"Good! at two cents a pound, that's three thousand dollars."
+
+"Better than that," beamed his chum. "Owing to the scarcity of fish,
+the market has gone up a cent a pound."
+
+"Four thousand five hundred dollars," cried Charley, in delight. "Over
+two thousand dollars to be divided up amongst us four. It's almost too
+good to be true."
+
+"And that's not all," added Walter, eagerly. "We are not going to lose
+much on the launch, after all. Mr. Daniels says she was insured for
+nearly her full value."
+
+"All's well that ends well," Charley commented. "We have not come out
+of our fishing venture so badly after all."
+
+"I am afraid we haven't reached the end just yet," said Walter, his
+countenance sobering. "I've got something pretty serious to tell you as
+soon as we are all alone."
+
+"If it's nothing real pressing, save it a while," said Charley,
+hastily. "I want to get some money from Mr. Daniels and pay off the
+launch captains. Then, I want a good long sleep with nothing to worry
+me. The Roberts have insisted on our staying with them a couple of days
+until we get straightened out. We will go over to their camp as soon as
+I get the fishermen paid off."
+
+It took but a short time to get the money and pay off the sleepy launch
+captains. They were all well-pleased with their share of the venture.
+Besides the ten dollars a day, they received four hundred and fifty
+dollars to be divided among them.
+
+This business attended to, our little party joined the Roberts in their
+launch and the run to camp was quickly made. As soon as it was reached,
+the workers turned in for a good, long sleep, and Walter was left alone
+with his secret.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXIII.
+
+THE SMUGGLERS AGAIN.
+
+
+WHILE his chums were making up the sleep they had lost, Walter took the
+Roberts launch and ran over to Palm Island. Brief as had been their
+stay on the little isle, he had grown quite fond of it and his anger
+rose as he viewed the work of the wreckers. The vandals had done their
+work well. Not a stick remained standing of the former cozy, little
+cabin. The wharf, too, was gone, even its posts had been hacked short
+off at the surface of the water.
+
+Leaving the scene of the ruin, Walter hobbled slowly over the little
+island looking all about with thoughtful interest. At last, he made his
+way back to the launch and returned to the Roberts camp.
+
+His companions were awake and stirring about. Chris was busily engaged
+in cooking dinner, while the rest were applying salve and bandages to
+their sore hands.
+
+Charley greeted his chum with an affectionate smile. "How's the foot?"
+he inquired.
+
+"Coming on all right," said Walter, cheerfully. "How about you, feeling
+better?"
+
+"Feeling fine and dandy," declared the other, "and I am as hungry as
+a wolf. I remember you had some bad news to tell me. Let's hear it. I
+feel able to face all kinds of trouble now."
+
+"I don't know as it is exactly bad news for us," said his chum. "In
+a way it doesn't concern us at all, unless we want to make it our
+business."
+
+"You are getting my curiosity aroused," Charley laughed. "Let's hear
+this news of yours."
+
+"The night you all left me in Clearwater, I did not go to a boarding
+house to stop. It had cost quite a bit to have my ankle fixed up and
+I did not have much money left and I was afraid to spend what little
+I had, for I knew, if you fellows were not successful in your trip,
+there was going to be mighty hard times ahead. I went out on the dock
+and looked around but I didn't quite fancy sleeping there so I went
+back uptown and hung around until the stores closed. I was getting
+pretty sleepy by this time, so I went down again to the bay and looked
+around until I found what I wanted, a skiff pulled up high and dry on
+the sand. There were some old nets in the bottom and I crawled in,
+stretched out on one of the nets, and pulled the other one over me,
+getting my head under a seat to keep out the dew. I went to sleep as
+cozy as a bug in a rug. I don't know how long I had slept when I woke
+up to the sound of voices. Four men were sitting on the edge of my
+skiff talking together. It was too dark to see their faces but I knew
+one of the voices. It was Hunter's and you can bet your life I laid
+mighty still and listened.
+
+"They were talking about us at first and it made my blood boil to hear
+them chuckling over the harm they had done us, but there was nothing I
+could do but lay quiet and stand it. They talked about the cache and
+wondered where we had hidden the liquor. At last they came to what, I
+guess, was the real object of their meeting where no one could hear
+them. Having disposed of us, as they thought, they have arranged to
+bring in another large lot of aguardiente."
+
+"When?" Charley demanded, eagerly.
+
+"To-night. They expect the schooner at the island at about midnight.
+They talked it over and arranged all the details of the job before they
+separated."
+
+"To-night at midnight," Charley mused. "We had better go right over and
+tell the sheriff."
+
+"That was the first thing I thought of," Walter said. "I was up at his
+house by sunrise the next morning but it was no use. His wife told me
+he was very ill and could not be seen."
+
+"Queer, he is never around when that smuggling is going on," observed
+Charley, suspiciously. "I wonder if it can be that he is standing in
+with the smugglers for a share of the profits."
+
+"Not Sheriff Daley," spoke up Bill Roberts, warmly. "He is as square
+a man as ever lived. Queer, though," he added, slowly, "I saw him just
+the day before and he looked the picture of health, but then, it may be
+appendicitis or some such sudden illness that's struck him."
+
+"It's too bad," said Captain Westfield. "It leaves those rascals free
+to carry out their devilment. Of course, it's none of our business, but
+it seems wrong to have such things going on."
+
+"No, of course it is none of our business," Charley agreed,
+hesitatingly. "How many of them are there in it, Walt? Did you hear?"
+
+"Only the four that met," his chum replied. "They were discussing
+getting a couple more men to help, but Hunter objected as it would mean
+more division of the profits. He said the schooner's crew could help
+land the stuff."
+
+"Did he say how many were on the schooner?" Bill Roberts inquired.
+
+"Four men and a boy," replied Walter.
+
+"Well, as you have all said, I reckon it is none of our business," Bill
+observed.
+
+They sat in thoughtful silence for a few minutes.
+
+"It would be hard on Hunter's wife, if he was caught," Charley said,
+finally.
+
+"It would be the best thing that could happen for her," Bill declared.
+"She is a good woman. She works like a slave to support them both.
+Hunter blows in all the money he makes and lives on her earnings. He
+beats her like a dog, too."
+
+"The brute!" Walter exclaimed, hotly.
+
+"Dar's five hundred dollars to be gib to de one what catches de booze
+sellers, ain't dey?" Chris inquired. "'Pears like hit would be a
+powerful good thing for some one to cotch him an' send all dat money to
+dat poor woman."
+
+Captain Westfield looked from one to the other with a sheepish grin.
+"Thar isn't any use of our saying it's none of our business," he said.
+"Down deep in his heart each one of us knows it is his business. It's
+always a _man's_ business to stop wrong-doing."
+
+"Right you are," agreed Bill Roberts, with gruff heartiness. "I know we
+are all thinking about the the same things. It isn't so much that this
+man and his gang are breaking the law that counts, it's the misery and
+suffering which he causes that calls for action. There have been ten
+men killed in the fish camps here the past year, and what caused the
+killing? Rum, rum brought in and sold by Hunter. And that isn't all the
+misery he's caused. Think of the beaten wives and neglected children.
+It's time there was a stop put to it."
+
+"Yes," Captain Westfield agreed. "We are as much our brother's keeper
+as in the days of Cain."
+
+"I guess we are all pretty well agreed," smiled the practical Charley.
+"The question is, how are we going to take them. There are nine of
+them and only seven of us. Of course one of them is only a boy, but
+then, Walt is pretty well crippled up."
+
+"I'll be right there when the fun begins," his chum said, determinedly.
+"What if they are two more in number. We will be well armed, and surely
+a surprise counts for something. I went over the island while you were
+all sleeping and planned it all out. There is only one piece of the
+beach where a boat can land safely. There is a group of palmettoes
+close to it. Now what I planned is this. We had better start out in
+the launch early and run straight out of the pass as though we were
+going out to the reef. Once we get behind the island, and out of sight
+of Clearwater, we'll skirt the shore and run around to the north end.
+There's a little cove there where the launch will be hidden from both
+the gulf and the bay. When dark comes we can hide in the clump of
+palmettoes and wait. When they get to work in earnest, we can slip out
+and take them by surprise. Then five of us can keep them quiet with the
+rifles, while the other two tie them up. Once we have got them secure,
+we can load them into the launch, carry them straight to Tampa and turn
+them over to the sheriff there. How does that strike all of you?"
+
+"It sounds simple enough," Charley said, doubtfully, "too simple, in
+fact."
+
+"What fault can you find with it?" Walter demanded.
+
+"None," his chum answered, "only I have a hunch that Hunter is too
+clever and cunning a rascal to be caught so easily."
+
+"Have you any better plan to suggest?" Walter asked.
+
+But Charley had not, nor did any of the others, so, after some
+discussion, Walter's plan was adopted.
+
+As soon as dinner was over, some lunch was packed into a basket,
+and storing it and the loading rifles in the launch, they steered
+boldly out of the inlet. As soon as the island was between them and
+Clearwater, however, they shifted helm, and hugging its shore, ran down
+to its northern end.
+
+Here they found the little cove Walter had mentioned. Running the
+launch into it, they anchored and waded ashore. They placed their
+launch and rifles in the clump of palmettoes, and then there was
+nothing to do until the coming of night, except to pass the time away
+as best they could. By keeping on the gulf side of the island, there
+was no danger of their being seen from Clearwater, and this they were
+careful to do. A swim in the clear, warm water and the picking up of
+curious shells on the beach served to while away the balance of the
+afternoon. As soon as dark came, they retired within the clump of
+palms. With the going down of the sun came the rising of the moon.
+It was nearly full and its rays lit up the little island almost as
+brightly as day. Our little party welcomed its tropical radiance for it
+would allow them to see without being seen.
+
+The hours slipped slowly away. At first some attempt was made at
+story-telling and conversation, but soon all lapsed into a thoughtful
+silence. Each realized that they were about to engage in a desperate
+undertaking. In fact, it was almost a foolhardy act they contemplated.
+The smugglers had all the advantage in point of force. They were eight,
+able-bodied men beside the boy, and it was more than likely that all of
+them would be armed. Of their own party, the three Roberts boys were
+really the only active men. Charley, though unusually strong for his
+age, was only a boy, while the captain, vigorous though he still was,
+was getting well along in years. Walter was practically helpless with
+his broken ankle, while Chris was too small to be of much help where
+strength was required. But for the advantage that would lie in taking
+the smugglers by surprise, they were more likely to be the captured
+than the captors.
+
+These reflections and the long, expectant waiting were beginning to
+tell on their nerves, when they heard the welcome put-put of a distant
+launch.
+
+"They are coming, at last," said Charley, with a sigh of relief. "I can
+recognize that exhaust. The Hunters launch is the only one that sounds
+just like that."
+
+"The schooner must be somewhere near but I don't see her lights,"
+Walter observed.
+
+"Why, thar she is," exclaimed the captain, "sneaking inshore like a
+thief in the night."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXIV.
+
+THE SURPRISE.
+
+
+SO silently that they had been unaware of her approach, the strange
+craft had stolen in like a phantom ship to within two hundred yards of
+where they lay concealed. She now lay directly in the moon's path and
+its rays so bright set out every rope and sail in dark relief. Not a
+light shone aboard. Her captain had evidently been made wary by his
+former alarm and was taking all possible chances against drawing the
+attention of others.
+
+As silent as a ghost ship the graceful craft crept in to within a
+cable's length of the beach. Then, with a faint creak of traveling
+blocks she rounded gracefully up into the wind and a muffled splash
+told that her anchor had been dropped.
+
+She made a beautiful sight laying, swan-like, full in the glowing
+pathway of the moon, her great white sails quivering in the gentle
+breeze.
+
+"The bird is ready to flit away at the first alarm," whispered the
+captain. "See, he has got his anchor hove short and has taken in none
+of his sails but the jib. He could get under way again in half a
+minute. He's wary all right."
+
+"We had better not talk any more," cautioned Charley in a whisper.
+"Sound carries a long ways over the water and the launch is nearly
+here."
+
+With nerves at highest tension the little party waited.
+
+The loud throbbing of the launch's engine suddenly ceased. There came
+a splash from a dropped anchor, and more splashing as its crew waded
+ashore. Then came a murmuring of voices and the sound of footsteps, and
+the watchers drew further back into their hiding place as four figures
+came into view. They passed so close to the bunch of palms that their
+features were plain to the hiders. One was Hunter, himself, the other
+three they recognized as members of his gang.
+
+The four hurried down to the water's edge.
+
+"Ahoy," Hunter hailed the schooner. "It's all right. Come ashore."
+
+"Are you sure no one else is around?" cautiously inquired a voice from
+the schooner.
+
+The response had been in perfect English but something in the tones and
+the faint foreign accent made the chums stare at each other as though
+they had heard a voice from the grave.
+
+"No, there's no one here but ourselves," Hunter replied, impatiently.
+"Do you think I would be here if everything wasn't all right? Come, get
+a move on you, and hustle that stuff ashore. There's a lot to do, and
+it ain't many hours till daylight."
+
+Those on the schooner fell to work with feverish haste. A small dingy
+carried on deck was launched over the side. Two figures leaped into it
+and received the cases, two others brought up from the hold.
+
+As soon as the dingy was loaded, the two on deck scrambled aboard and
+one sculled her into shore.
+
+The moment she grounded, the captain leaped ashore. "Here is part of
+our goods," he said smoothly. "We can bring it all in in three more
+trips."
+
+"Good," Hunter growled. "Come, unload it. What are you waiting for?"
+
+"Only for our money, kind sir," said the schooner's captain, in smooth,
+suave tones which stirred in the chums old, cruel memories. "I think it
+would be best for each boat-load to be paid for as it is brought in."
+
+"Don't be a fool, man," said Hunter, roughly. "We can settle up when
+the job is done. We have got no time to waste, now."
+
+"Pay before unloading," insisted the captain of the schooner, politely.
+"Gentlemen in our business cannot be too careful. Of course I know you
+are the soul of honesty, but you are forgetful, my good friend. You
+have never remembered to pay me for that last lot I brought you."
+
+"How many cases?" Hunter demanded, with an oath, as he pulled out a
+greasy roll of bills.
+
+"Twenty cases, one hundred dollars," said the stranger.
+
+Hunter counted out the bills, and the schooner captain recounted them
+carefully and thrust them into his pocket.
+
+"You are still forgetting that little bank account of a hundred
+dollars," he remarked, pleasantly. "Surely, now is a splendid time to
+settle it."
+
+Hunter's face grew livid with anger, but he controlled his temper with
+an effort. He was quick to realize that he could only lose by a display
+of anger. The man already had a hundred dollars of his money, and still
+remained in possession of the liquor.
+
+The chums in their concealment chuckled inwardly at his plight. At last
+the rascally fisherman had met his equal in cunning.
+
+Grudgingly, he counted out another hundred dollars which the smuggler
+pocketed with a mocking bow of thanks.
+
+"It's a pleasure to do business with a spot-cash gentleman like you,"
+he declared. "Now, you may have your liquor, and there's three more
+boat-loads, just as good, at a hundred dollars a load."
+
+"You'll have to help us carry it up to the cache," Hunter growled.
+"There's too much of it for us four to get out of the way before
+daylight."
+
+"Always glad to oblige such a pleasant gentleman," said the smuggler,
+swinging a case up on his shoulder. "Many hands make light work." His
+companions silently followed his example, each shouldering a case and
+the fishermen similarly loaded fell in behind them.
+
+Hunter and one of his gang brought up the rear. As they came alongside
+the clump of palmettoes, Hunter nudged the man ahead.
+
+"Drop behind a bit," he said, softly.
+
+The man slowed his walk.
+
+"That fellow's got too much of our money to get away with it," he
+declared in tones too low to reach those ahead.
+
+The man nodded. "We've got to take it from him," he agreed.
+
+"We'd better wait until all the stuff is landed," planned Hunter.
+"We'll jump him just as he gets ready to leave and make him shell out.
+He can't make any trouble about it. He dasn't make any kick to the
+authorities. Tell the rest of the boys when you get a chance."
+
+The whispered conference had taken less than a minute but the alert
+smuggler glanced suspiciously back at the two plotters and they
+quickened their steps.
+
+"Our work is half done for us if they are going to fight amongst
+themselves," exulted Charley, as the procession passed out of hearing.
+"We had better wait till the trouble starts and then come down on
+them."
+
+"Did you notice that smuggler captain's voice?" asked Captain
+Westfield, eagerly.
+
+Walter's eyes were gleaming. "It's Manuel George, the Greek
+interpreter," he exclaimed, softly. "The rascal that caused us so much
+misery and stole our schooner from us."
+
+"And that's our dear old 'Beauty' lying out there," declared Charley,
+a thrill in his voice. "We have got to take her, if we risk our lives
+doing it. But here they come back again."
+
+The smugglers were losing no time but working with all possible
+rapidity. The first dingy load was quickly transferred to its hiding
+place and a second load brought ashore, the smuggler captain insisting
+on his pay before a case was unloaded, a third load quickly followed
+the second, and just as the morning star began to show in the east, the
+fourth and last load was brought ashore.
+
+To the hidden watchers it seemed a century of waiting. With the coming
+of the last load, the tension became almost unbearable. A few minutes
+now would decide whether or not they were to recover their dearly loved
+ship which they had long since given up as lost, to them, forever.
+
+The fisherman and smuggler captain seemed to be in excellent spirits
+as the work progressed. They laughed and joked with each other, but it
+seemed to Charley, keenly observant, that their gaiety was forced. He
+imagined a sinister note under their high spirits and the watchful,
+alert smuggler captain, for all his affected friendliness, seemed to be
+watching every movement of the fishermen. All were working at top speed
+now to complete the unloading before day, and the pile of cases in the
+dingy rapidly diminished.
+
+As the carriers passed back and forth to and from the new cache they
+were making, there would be a few minutes each trip when they were far
+enough away from the concealed ones for the little party to hold low,
+whispered conversation.
+
+"We want to act all together," Charley said, during one of these
+intervals. "When I say, 'Now', we will cover them with our rifles and
+step out upon them. I am going to wait till the last minute to give the
+word. If they have a mix-up and get to fighting among themselves, it
+will make our job doubly easy."
+
+As the procession passed by on its last trip, the lad chuckled softly.
+
+"That Hunter is certainly one clever rascal," he whispered. "Did you
+notice he and his men head the procession this trip for the first time?"
+
+"I don't see the advantage in that," Walter remarked.
+
+"Don't you? Why, they will be the first to unload and consequently the
+first to turn back. That will put them between the Greeks and the
+dingy. Something is going to happen pretty quick. Be ready. Here they
+come back."
+
+Empty-handed, the eight were returning to the beach chatting gaily
+together. As Charley had prophesied, Hunter and his three companions
+were well in the lead. At the dingy bow, the four turned and gathered
+close together.
+
+The Greek captain was quick to notice the move. A few words in Greek
+brought his men crowding around him. If he felt any fear, however, it
+did not show in his face or manner.
+
+"Our agreeable business is pleasantly ended, gentlemen," he said,
+smoothly. "When will you want more of the liquor, Mr. Hunter?"
+
+"Won't want any more," Hunter growled, surlily. "The game's too risky.
+There's too many getting on to it. It's time to quit."
+
+"Very well," said the smuggler, coolly. "Now, we must bid you good-by,
+gentlemen, and be on our way."
+
+"You Greek fool," Hunter snarled. "Do you think you are going to leave
+here with all that money? Hand it over, quick!"
+
+"Out of the way!" cried the Greek captain, as he leaped forward,
+followed by his men.
+
+In a second smugglers and fishermen were mingled together in a fierce
+struggle.
+
+"Now," called Charley, clearly, and his companions stepped forth with
+leveled rifles.
+
+"Hands up--all of you," he shouted.
+
+The fighting instantly ceased and the surprised combatants turned to
+face the new enemy.
+
+Then came an interruption that struck both parties with fear and dismay.
+
+From the gulf rose a huge, bat-like thing which swept down upon them
+with a whirling, sucking mumble.
+
+"De haunts," shrieked Chris, and fled as fast as his shaking legs would
+carry him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXV.
+
+AND THE LAST.
+
+
+THE others were hardly less frightened than the little darkey. The
+Greeks fell to their knees and mumbled prayers, while the fishermen
+stood white-faced and panic-stricken. Even the party with the rifles in
+their hands felt a thrill of fear as the gruesome object swept down on
+them. Suddenly the whirling sound ceased and the creature of the night
+glided down to the ground before them.
+
+"A hydroplane," cried Walter, with a sigh of relief, fervently echoed
+by his companions.
+
+From the air-ship stepped out three men, two of whom they recognized
+with a thrill of joy. They were Sheriff Daley and his deputy. The third
+man was a stranger to them.
+
+The three approached the panic-stricken group of smugglers with drawn
+revolvers.
+
+"I arrest you all in the name of the United States of America,"
+announced the stranger, throwing back his coat and showing a marshal's
+star. "Put the handcuffs on them, Sheriff Daley."
+
+The sheriff stepped back to the hydroplane and brought out a bunch of
+jangling handcuffs which he proceeded to lock on the cowering captives
+who offered no resistance.
+
+"Take them down to their launch and run them over to Clearwater,
+Sheriff," the stranger directed, as soon as the job was done. "Keep
+them guarded close till evening, then we will take them on to the
+Federal prison in Atlanta. I will follow you in the hydroplane in a
+little while. I have a few words to say to our friends here before I
+leave."
+
+As soon as the sheriff was gone with his prisoners, the stranger turned
+to our friends with a smile.
+
+"There is considerable explaining to be done, gentlemen," he said,
+pleasantly. "Let's go out aboard the schooner where we will be more
+comfortable."
+
+Chris was called down from the top of a tall palmetto where he had
+taken refuge and the bewildered party followed the stranger aboard
+the dingy and were soon standing on the deck of their well-beloved
+"Beauty." The boys felt a lump in their throats as they looked upon the
+familiar, beautiful ship. The captain was here and there and everywhere
+over her deck. Examining everything like a parent with a long lost
+child.
+
+"They haven't harmed her at all," he declared, with joy. "Only painted
+her over a different color and altered the rigging to disguise her. No
+wonder we thought she looked familiar to us."
+
+It was with reluctance that the delighted old sailor obeyed the
+marshal's summons down into the cabin.
+
+"My friends, you have unknowingly made me a lot of trouble and pretty
+nearly caused me a failure," the stranger said, when they were all
+seated around the cabin table.
+
+"We will have to ask you to explain," Charley said. "We are all
+thoroughly bewildered."
+
+"I suppose things do seem rather mixed up to you," smiled the
+stranger. "Well, I will try to make everything plain. For some time
+the government has been receiving complaints of liquor being smuggled
+into various places along the West coast, and at last, I was assigned
+to trace up the smugglers and this seemed to me to be as likely a
+place as any to start my investigations. Well, it didn't take long to
+determine who disposed of the liquor here, but it was quite another
+thing to discover the identity of the smugglers. I had a pretty full
+description of the schooner from several parties who had seen her
+hanging around at different places along the coast. One man had even
+seen the crew and he described them to me pretty accurately. But when
+I tried to find out who were the schooner's owners and what port she
+hailed from I ran against a snag. No ship answering her description
+was registered in either America or Cuba. Quite by chance, when in
+Tarpon Springs, I heard of your lost ship, and the description of her
+and the Greeks on her, tallied so exactly with the schooner and the
+smugglers that I was convinced that they were one and the same. Having
+got a clue to the smugglers and the receivers, the next thing was to
+catch them in the act. I took up my residence in Tarpon Springs with a
+friend who happened to be an enthusiastic air man, and went to work.
+I spent most of my nights on the island going there after dark in my
+friend's hydroplane. I was getting along very nicely when you took up
+residence on the island and upset my plans. I was quite out of patience
+that first night when you were the means of frightening the schooner
+away. And then when you found the cache of liquor, I almost gave up
+hope. I was afraid you would ring in the local authorities and that
+they would mess up things without the evidence necessary to convict the
+offenders. To discourage them at the start, if they should take any
+action, I removed the liquor from the cache. In fact, I was almost as
+anxious as Hunter to have your party leave the island. However, all's
+well that ends well, and I have got the rascals at last, where they
+cannot escape long jail sentences. I was posted on to-night's doing
+through having easy access to Hunter's mail when it passed through the
+post-office. An accident to the hydroplane's engine came near making me
+too late to take the rascals in charge. As it is, I will have to have
+the testimony of your party taken down in writing to-morrow, for I did
+not see the actual handling of the smuggled goods myself. And now, I
+guess that is the whole story. It will doubtless explain many things
+which have puzzled you."
+
+"Then it must have been you whom Chris took for a ghost?" Walter said.
+
+"And you are the one who brought us the liquor and the doctor when
+Walter was so ill," Charley exclaimed.
+
+"I plead guilty to both charges," said the marshal, with a smile. "One
+other thing I would mention that is important to you," he added. "In
+smuggling cases, the government usually seizes the vessel, but in this
+case, you, the real owners, are so entirely innocent of wrong-doing,
+that I am going to assume the responsibility of leaving you in
+uninterrupted possession of your vessel. And now, I am thoroughly tired
+out and so I'll wish you good night, or rather good morning. Meet me in
+Clearwater this afternoon and we will finish up our business together."
+
+When the marshal was gone and the Roberts boys had departed for their
+camp, the four chums sat in happy content in the "Beauty's" cozy cabin.
+
+"Pinch me that I may make sure I am not dreaming," Walter sighed,
+blissfully. "All this seems too good to be true."
+
+"If you are dreaming, I am, too, and do not want to be wakened,"
+Charley said. "Gee! a few weeks ago we had nothing but the clothes on
+our backs. Now we have over two thousand dollars in cash and a ship
+that we can easily sell for three thousand dollars more, and best, of
+all, we have been able to assist the Roberts, who were so friendly to
+us when we sorely needed friends, to a share in a part of our good
+fortune."
+
+"It's the good Lord's kindness," said Captain Westfield, reverently.
+"Let's thank him for the blessings he has showered upon us."
+
+All were silent for a time after the heartfelt prayer was ended. At
+last Walter said, practically:
+
+"What shall we do now? No use to start fishing again, it's only a few
+days till closed season."
+
+"I can tell you what we had better do, next," Charley said, rising.
+
+"What?" his chum demanded.
+
+"Turn in and get a good sleep," Charley responded, yawning.
+
+And safe in their bunks, dreaming blissfully of the future, we must for
+the present leave our four friends.
+
+What the future held in store for them our readers can discover in
+the next volume of their adventures: "The Boy Chums Conquering The
+Wilderness; or, Charley and Walter Amongst the Seminole Indians."
+
+
+THE END.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+Transcriber's Notes:
+
+Original text did not have a Table of Contents. One was created by the
+transcriber to aid the reader.
+
+Obvious punctuation repaired.
+
+Page 1, "Chnms" changed to "Chums" (The Boy Chums' Perilous Cruise)
+
+Page 22, "comforable" changed to "comfortable" ( a comfortable,
+home-like)
+
+Page 90, "know" changed to "knew" (chum knew what he)
+
+Page 131, "somethink" changed to "something" (children or something)
+
+Page 144, "Monays" changed to "Morays" (Morays, a kind of salt)
+
+Page 149, "Permangate" changed to "Permanganate" (Permanganate of
+potash)
+
+Page 221, "dopped" changed to "dropped" (dropped off to sleep)
+
+Page 226, "contracted" changed to "contacted" (wires contacted and)
+
+Page 227, "appetities" changed to "appetites" (appetites of wolves)
+
+Page 232, "riggled" changed to "wriggled" (which wriggled at their)
+
+Page 243, "fesh-water" changed to "fresh-water" (fresh-water oysters,
+upon)
+
+Page 253, "tattoed" changed to "tattooed" (tattooed on his back)
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Chums Cruising in Florida
+Waters, by Wilmer M. Ely
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 43856 ***